Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 3112

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SECTION 0

INTRODUCTION
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


INTRODUCTION
ABOUT YOUR NEW LOADER AND THE
INSTRUCTION MANUALS
LETOURNEAU, INC.
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF MACHINE
LETOURNEAU, INC. FRONT-END LOADER OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS
SERVICE MANUAL AND PARTS CATALOG
SIGNAL WORDS – SERVICE MANUAL
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING LETOURNEAU, INC.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF MACHINE


LeTourneau, Inc. loaders are rugged articulated front-end loaders specifically built for long
lasting operation in mining environments. Bucket size is determined by the weight (density) of
material to be handled.
A diesel engine and AC generator provide power to electric traction motors that propel the
loader at variable speeds, forward and reverse. This power train is augmented by additional
fluid power systems that control all bucket, hoist and steering operations.
The four drive motors are coupled to LeTourneau, Inc. epicyclic gearboxes called drivers.
Operation of the loader is further enhanced by a solid-state drive system.
Braking is accomplished by three separate systems. The primary braking system utilizes the
regenerative and retard characteristics of the drive motors. The secondary system, the service
brakes, is an air-operated disc brake attached to each motor armature shaft. The third system,
the parking brake, is a spring-applied, air release brake.

GENERAL INFORMATION provides illustrations of the major features and


dimensions and a specifications list for the loader.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INTRODUCTION 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

LETOURNEAU, INC. FRONT-END LOADER OPERATING ENVIRONMENT


LeTourneau, Inc. rubber-tired front-end loaders are designed as rugged all-weather loading
tools for the mining and quarrying industries. They are designed as off-highway mining
equipment for use in open pit applications that are in remote locations. Due to their very large
size, they must work in an area with few other machines, and the only proximity to buildings
would be for routine maintenance or repair. They are not to be operated near office buildings
or residential areas.

The operators of this machine are advised not to approach local residences
or business establishments within a distance of 328 yards (300 meters) in
order to prevent interference with their television and radio reception.

Their primary function is to load loose material (i.e., blasted rock, crushed stone, sand, coal,
overburden, etc.) into hauling units such as mining trucks and rail trains. A typical application
would be loading end-dump mining trucks from a bank of blasted rock.
The loaders can withstand and are fully functional in temperatures ranging from -40° F to
+122° F (-40° C to +50° C), 0-100% humidity, and in all forms of precipitation, day or night.
Operating at elevation is only limited by the restrictions placed on the diesel engine power unit,
and theoretically could exceed 14,260 ft. (4500 meters). They can readily work in standing
water of a depth to the bottom of the machine’s axles.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SINGLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS FOR SERVICE MANUAL AND PARTS CATALOG
INTRODUCTION
There are two ways to print a document within the LeTourneau Service Manual or Parts
Catalog. Either method may be used with the same printed results on paper. The selection of
either method for printing is determined by the user's requirements for printing. The
differences in selecting the printing method best suited for various print jobs are explained by
reading the instructions found in the following two topics:

z Single Page Printing allows the user to print only a single electronic page with each
click of the print button.
{ One electronic page may print on more than one paper page. SEE NOTE 3
z Multiple Page Printing allows the user to print multiple electronic pages by invoking a
special print function designed for that purpose.
{ One electronic page may print on more than one paper page. SEE NOTE 3

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001A ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SINGLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


SINGLE PAGE PRINTING
INTRODUCTION
When printing any page using the "single page printing" function, the user must first go to the
page to be printed, (not necessary with multiple page printing). Once the user has navigated
to the "document" page to be printed, the appropriate page size, orientation, margins and font
size must be set in the IE (Internet Explorer) browser. Once they are set, they will remain until
manually changed.

STEP 1: SETTING UP THE PRINTING PARAMETERS BEFORE PRINTING PAGES


When printing HTML "documents" (most instruction pages in the service manual), Linkone
utilizes the IE browser print function based on "page setup". The typical method for opening
the "page setup" box in the IE browser is by selecting the Windows "Start" menu, then
"Internet Explorer" and "page setup". Doing this will bring up the illustration shown below.
Before printing, change the page orientation, size and margins to the parameters shown
below (as appropriate, according to the "Print Note Suggestion", explained later in these
instructions).
1. Paper margins
• All margins must be set
to .75”.
• All the information pages
have been formatted for
these margins. If the
margins are set to any
other size, some text,
graphics and charts might
be cut off and will appear
incomplete.
2. Paper orientation (Use Print
Note Suggestion)
• Landscape
• Portrait
3. Paper size (Use Print Note
Suggestion)
• 8-1/2x11
• 11x17
4. Font (text) size (located in the
IE browser "view" menu bar).
• Medium
NOTE: Since the majority of the information "documents" in the service manual are printed
on 8-1/2x11 paper, the IE browser should be set to 8-1/2 x 11 in portrait orientation. These
settings will remain as the IE default unless manually changed.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001A ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SINGLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STEP 2: USING THE APPROPRIATE PRINT SELECTIONS
Select "print" in Linkone by selecting the
menu "File" then "Print" and selecting the
appropriate printing selection as
explained below.

z Print Book: Prints the entire book.


Making this selection does NOT
change the page size and
orientation as required on some
pages.
z Print Page: Prints both the "picture"
and "document" pages. It prints a
single ELECTRONIC page, even
though that may actually be printed
on several PAPER pages.
z Print Picture: Prints only the
"picture" window pane. The
illustration is automatically scaled
to the paper size selected.
z Print Text: Prints only the selected
text. Linkone versions previous to
4.2.3.0 may print the entire page
instead of just the selected text.
This has been corrected in current
versions.
z Print Zoomed Area: Prints the
zoomed area on an illustration in
the "picture" page.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001A ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SINGLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STEP 3: USING A PRINT SELECTION BUTTON
There are also three print buttons
located to the right of the "help" menu
that perform some of the same
functions as explained above (those
found in the "Print" menu).

The first button (1) prints the


z
current page by printing the
"picture", then the "document"
window panes. If only one
window pane (document or
picture) is present, only it will be
printed. See illustration at left.
z The second button (2) prints
only the parts list or "document"
window pane. One electronic
page may print on several paper
pages and will be in correct
order. See illustration at left.
z The third button (3) prints only
the "picture" whether it is
included with a parts list or
"document". See illustration at
left.
NOTE: If the user is unfamiliar with the LEPS scheme, simply hold the mouse over the
buttons to see the screen tip that explains the function of each button.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001A ( d 4 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SINGLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STEP 4: IDENTIFYING A "DOCUMENT" AND "PICTURE" WINDOW PANE (PAGE) IN A
SERVICE MANUAL
The user must be able to distinguish
between a "Document" and "Picture"
before selecting a print function.
Two types of pages exist in the service
manual:
1) "Picture" (p) pages (see illustration
at left):
z Pages with illustrations (referred
to as “picture” in the printing
selections).
z A “picture” page has only a
graphic or photograph. It does
not contain text unless the text is
actually part of the graphic or
photograph.
2) "Document" (d) pages (see
illustration at left):
z In HTML format (referred to as
“parts list or document" in the
printing selections)
z The "document” page can
simultaneously have a
graphic/photograph and text.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001A ( d 5 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SINGLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STEP 5: PRINTING A "DOCUMENT" OR "PICTURE" WINDOW PANE (PAGE) IN A
SERVICE MANUAL
When printing a "Document" window
pane, the Linkone print set-up box must
be changed to the appropriate (1) paper
size and (2) orientation.

z The IE browser must also be


changed to the appropriate paper
size and orientation as explained
above in "SETTING UP THE
PRINTING PARAMETERS
BEFORE PRINTING PAGES".
z To print a "Document", select the
"Print...Document" from the "Print"
menu bar on the "File" menu of the
Linkone viewer or select the
"Print...Document" button.
z When printing a "Picture" window
pane (page) use the print set-up
box to change the orientation and
size of the paper.
z To print a "picture", select "File"
then "Print" and "Print Picture" in
the Linkone viewer menubar or
select the "print picture" button as
explained in "USING THE
APPROPRIATE PRINT
BUTTONS/SELECTIONS".

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001A ( d 6 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SINGLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STEP 6: IDENTIFYING A "DOCUMENT" AND "PICTURE" WINDOW PANE (PAGE) IN A
PARTS CATALOG
A parts catalog has "parts list" and
"picture" pages.
1) "Parts List" pages contain:
z Item numbers
z Pages with a list of various
information.
z Part numbers
z Quantities
z Descriptions
z Other various information.
2) "Picture" pages contain:
z Illustrations
{ Graphics
{ Photographs
{ Schematics
{ Diagrams

STEP 7: PRINTING A "PICTURE" OR "PARTS LIST" WINDOW PANE (PAGE) IN A


PARTS CATALOG
When printing any type of page in the parts catalog, the Linkone print set-up box must be
used to change the (1) size and (2) orientation of the paper.
z To print a "Picture", select menu
"File" then "Print" and "Print
Picture" in the Linkone viewer
menu bar or select the "print
picture" button as explained in
"USING THE APPROPRIATE
PRINT
BUTTONS/SELECTIONS".
z To print a "Parts List", select
"File" then "Print" and "Print
Document or Parts List" in the
Linkone viewer menu bar or
select the "Print Parts List...."
button as explained in "USING
THE APPROPRIATE PRINT
BUTTONS/SELECTIONS".
NOTE: To print from a Parts Catalog, the IE browser does not have to be changed as when
printing in a service manual. All printing parameters can be set in the Linkone Print set-up
box.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001A ( d 7 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SINGLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STEP 8: DETERMINING WHICH PRINT NOTE TO USE WHEN PRINTING
The bottom left side of the "document"
window pane provides a "Print Note
Suggestion" and shows which print
note to view when determining the
particular size or orientation to use
when printing.

z If no print note appears at the


bottom left of the "document"
window pane, then the default of
8-1/2x11 paper in portrait
orientation should be used to
print the "picture" and/or "parts
list or document" pages.

"Print Notes" are provided in the


"PRINT NOTES" menu in the top
menu bar. Each note title shows what
orientation and size to print a
particular "picture" or "document".
Selecting a print note also gives a
more detailed explanation of printing
that type of page.

z Once the user becomes familiar


with the details of the notes,
simply viewing the title should
be sufficient to select the correct
size and orientation.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001A ( d 8 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SINGLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


NOTE 1: Text and illustrations being printed in the "document" window pane should be
printed on the suggested paper size and orientation. All the "documents" are formatted for
the suggested "Print Note" parameters. If desired, the illustrations in the "picture" window
pane can be printed on different size paper than suggested in the print note. Before setting a
parameter other than is suggested, consider the following:

z The illustration being printed will be scaled to the size of the paper selected.
z If 11x17 is suggested in the print note and 8-1/2x11 paper is selected, the illustration
will be printed, but at a much smaller size. Viewing that illustration may be difficult.
z If a Print Note suggests that a "picture" be printed on 8-1/2x11 paper, it can be printed
on a larger paper size.
{ The illustration will be scaled to fit the paper, although some degree of "blurring"
may occur.
NOTE 2: The LEPS scheme was used to provide a screen capture for these instructions.

z A "scheme" is a method for setting how your Linkone window is viewed (appears) on
your screen.
z If the user is using a customized scheme, the pictures in these instructions could
appear differently on their screen.
z All LeTourneau electronic manuals are provided with a LEPS scheme.
{ For more information on "schemes" and how to change them, please refer to the
pocket-sized "Users Guide For Navigating..." included inside the case of the
electronic manuals.
„ The "scheme" information is located on the last page of the guide. There is
also more information located in the "Linkone Electronic Users Guide"
included with the LeTourneau Electronic Manuals.
NOTE 3: An electronic page may print on more than one paper page.

z The electronic page appears only once on the screen and may be longer than a single
paper page.
z In some instances, 2, 5, 10 or more paper pages may be printed.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001A ( d 9 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MULTIPLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


MULTIPLE PAGE PRINTING
Before reading the following information, please review all the instructions found in "SINGLE
PAGE PRINTING".
INTRODUCTION
The "multiple page printing function" is optional. When only a few pages are printed, the on-
screen printing functions as described in "SINGLE PAGE PRINTING" may be faster. The
multiple page printing function requires installation of the Linkone "active-x" control. If you are
not sure whether it has been installed, complete STEPS 1 & 2 below. If the print function
screen shown in STEP 2 appears, the active-x control has been installed. If the screen does
not appear, close all programs, reinsert your service manual DVD and select the active-x
installation button that appears on the automatic start-up screen. Follow the on-screen
instructions during installation. Follow normal procedures for rebooting your CPU. Some
computer operating systems require an administrator to perform any installations. Contact your
IT department before performing any installation or re-installation.
The pages in the Service Manual are called "alpha-numeric" because they are numbered using
a letter/s of the alphabet and a set of numbers. Refer to the illustration in STEP 1 below for an
example. At the bottom right side of a printed paper page, the end of the alpha numeric
number will be either of two "identifiers" that are contained within parenthesis and coded "p" or
"d". A simple number sequence follows the "identifier". The "identifier" identifies which page
was printed, the picture window pane "p" or document window pane "d" (refer to "Single Page
Printing" page STEP 4 for identifying window panes). The simple number sequence following
the "identifier" shows the order that the paper pages were printed.
This example shows two paper document window panes printed: 001A041 ( d 1), 001A041
( d 2), etc.
This example shows two paper picture window panes printed: 001A041 ( p 1), 001A041
( p 2), etc.
Understanding this sequence helps identify the order of paper pages, should they inadvertently
get moved out of place during handling.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001B ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MULTIPLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STEP 1. SELECTING THE MULTIPLE PAGE PRINTING FUNCTION
To select the "multiple page printing function", click the Icon located in the top menu. The
user must be using the LEPS scheme to see the icon. See (1) on illustration below. All STEP
instructions given in "SINGLE PAGE PRINTING" (with the exception of #2 & #3) are valid for
multiple page printing. The appropriate page size, orientation, margins and font size must
still be set in the IE (Internet Explorer) browser before printing a "document" from the
manual. To learn how to set these, please review those instructions previously mentioned in
"SINGLE PAGE PRINTING".
(1) Selecting the "multiple page printing
function" allows the following pages to
be printed:
z Multiple random pages: Pages
randomly selected by skipping
certain unwanted pages to be
printed. Example:
001A007,001A009,001A011.
z Sequential range of pages: Pages
that are sequential and have no
unwanted pages between the print
range. Example: 001A009-
001A0011.
NOTE: Page numbers are located at the
top of the screen in the title bar.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001B ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MULTIPLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STEP 2. LOAD THE PAGES TO PRINT
When the "multiple page printing
function" icon is selected, the screen to
the left appears.

(1) Click the "load pages" button located


at the top right corner of the screen.

STEP 3. IDENTIFY THE LOCATION OF THE DIFFERENT OPTIONS


When the "load pages" button is clicked,
the screen to the left appears. There are
different options available on this
screen. They include:

(1) Page Range


z Select available pages
z Input page range
(2) Input Page Range
(3) Print
z List or document
z Graphic
z Both

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001B ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MULTIPLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STEP 4. SELECT THE "PAGE RANGE" OPTION
(1) The "select available pages" option
allows the user to select pages to be
printed by clicking checkboxes on a
page number list. See illustration at left
for example.

z The checkboxes may be selected


randomly or in sequential order.

To select pages to print, click on the


checkboxes and notice that a
checkmark appears in the box.

(2) The "Input page range" option allows


the user to type in a page range to be
printed by using a dash between the
pages. See illustration at left for
example.

(3) To select a range of pages to be


printed, type the page numbers into the
"input page range" box separated with a
dash (-).
STEP 5. SELECT THE APPROPRIATE "PRINT" OPTION
(1) The "List" option causes the parts list
or document window pane to be printed.

NOTE: For more information on how to


identify a "document" window pane,
please review "PRINTING
INSTRUCTIONS FOR SERVICE
MANUAL AND PARTS CATALOG
(SINGLE PAGE PRINTING), STEP 4:
IDENTIFYING A "DOCUMENT" AND
"PICTURE" WINDOW PANE (PAGE) IN
A SERVICE MANUAL" above.

Once the page range is typed into the


box, click "print" to print the selected
page range.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001B ( d 4 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MULTIPLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


(2) The "Graphic" option causes the
"picture or graphic" window pane to be
printed.

NOTE: For more information on how to


identify a "picture or graphic" window
pane, please review "PRINTING
INSTRUCTIONS FOR SERVICE
MANUAL AND PARTS CATALOG
(SINGLE PAGE PRINTING), STEP 4:
IDENTIFYING A "DOCUMENT" AND
"PICTURE" WINDOW PANE (PAGE) IN
A SERVICE MANUAL" above.

Once the "graphic" option is selected,


click "print" to print the selected page
range.

(3) The "Both" option causes the parts


list/document and illustration/picture
window panes to be printed.

NOTE: For more information on how to


identify a "picture or graphic" window
pane, please review "PRINTING
INSTRUCTIONS FOR SERVICE
MANUAL AND PARTS CATALOG
(SINGLE PAGE PRINTING), STEP 4:
IDENTIFYING A "DOCUMENT" AND
"PICTURE" WINDOW PANE (PAGE) IN
A SERVICE MANUAL" above.

Once the page range is typed into the


box, click "print" to print the selected
page range.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001B ( d 5 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MULTIPLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STEP 6. CLOSE ANY "NOTES" THAT APPEAR ON SCREEN DURING THE PRINTING
PROCESS
During the multiple page printing
process, the print function opens each
page before it is printed. If a page
contains a pop-up note such as "video
notice", the note will appear on the
screen and stop the printing process. To
continue the printing process
uninterrupted, close the note first before
acknowledging the "Linkone printing
message" on-screen box. Follow the
procedure below for clicking on the note,
closing it, and acknowledging the print
box message.

(1) Locate the note appearing behind


the print note message box.
(2) Click anywhere on the pop-up note.

z This causes the note to come to


the front of the print message box.

(3) Click the small "X" at the top right of


the note box.

z This closes the note box.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001B ( d 6 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MULTIPLE PAGE PRINTING INSTRUCTIONS 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


(4) Click "OK" on the print message box.
Printing will continue uninterrupted
(unless another page with a pop-up note
is encountered.

NOTE: Pop-up notes have been kept to


a minimum during original creation of
the service manuals. Minimal
interruption, caused by pop-up notes,
should occur during the multiple page
printing process.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001B ( d 7 )
SERVICE MANUAL
Training only! Always use your machine original
PRINTING documentation!
TURN-PAGES

The links below are used only to print "Turn-Pages". The links go to "mini-books" that contain only the
pages used during turn-page printing. There are no pages in any publications below that do not appear in
the Service Manual or associated publications. These links are provided only for those wishing to print the
entire manual and understand the need to print pages in different orientations. When printing from the links
below, use the title of the link to determine how to set the printer page orientation and size default. The first
word in the link indicates what should be printed...LIST (DOCUMENT) or PICTURE. Only the document or
picture should be printed from the specific linked book chosen. The first page of the link selected shows a
screen capture of the printer set-up for those pages.

PICTURE LANDSCAPE 8-1/2 X 11

PICTURE LANDSCAPE 11 X 17

DOCUMENT LANDSCAPE 8-1/2 X 11

DOCUMENT LANDSCAPE 11 X 17

PICTURE PORTRAIT 11 X 17

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all
relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read
and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic,
repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A001C( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
Print Note 1 Instructions 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


This is a "mini-book" that is used for printing only the "turn-pages".
It is NOT intended for ELECTRONIC viewing.
If you have inadvertently linked to this manual and wish to return to the service manual,
select the last selection under the "Print Note" menu at the top-center of the screen.
INSTRUCTION FOR PRINTING FROM THIS BOOK

z The screen capture below shows the printer set-up for printing the pages in this book.
z The paper size is 8-1/2 X 11 (letter).
z The orientation is "LANDSCAPE".
z The "Pages to Print" selection is set to "Picture Only".
z The list or documents should NOT be printed from this book.

IN THE MENU-BAR SELECT: "FILE / PRINT / PRINT BOOK" TO SEE THE ABOVE SCREEN.
This book is for printing "Picture" ONLY.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 00A001D ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
Print Note 2 Instructions 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


This is a "mini-book" that is used for printing only the "turn-pages".
It is NOT intended for ELECTRONIC viewing.
If you have inadvertently linked to this manual and wish to return to the service manual,
select the last selection under the "Print Note" menu at the top-center of the screen.
INSTRUCTION FOR PRINTING FROM THIS BOOK

z The screen capture below shows the printer set-up for printing the pages in this book.
z The paper size is 11 X 17 (tabloid).
z The orientation is "LANDSCAPE".
z The "Pages to Print" selection is set to "Picture Only".
z The List or Document should NOT be printed from this book.

IN THE MENU-BAR SELECT: "FILE / PRINT / PRINT BOOK" TO SEE THE ABOVE SCREEN.
This book is for printing "Picture" ONLY.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 00A001E ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
Print Note 3 Instructions 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


This is a "mini-book" that is used for printing only the "turn-pages".
It is NOT intended for ELECTRONIC viewing.
If you have inadvertently linked to this manual and wish to return to the service manual,
select the last selection under the "Print Note" menu at the top-center of the screen.
INSTRUCTION FOR PRINTING FROM THIS BOOK

z The screen capture below shows the printer set-up for printing the pages in this book.
z The paper size is 8-1/2 X 11 (letter).
z The orientation is "LANDSCAPE".
z The "Pages to Print" selection is set to "List Only".
z The Pictures should NOT be printed from this book.

IN THE MENU-BAR SELECT: "FILE / PRINT / PRINT BOOK" TO SEE THE ABOVE SCREEN.
This book is for printing "List" ONLY.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 00A001F ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
Print Note 4 Instructions 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


This is a "mini-book" that is used for printing only the "turn-pages".
It is NOT intended for ELECTRONIC viewing.
If you have inadvertently linked to this manual and wish to return to the service manual,
select the last selection under the "Print Note" menu at the top-center of the screen.
INSTRUCTION FOR PRINTING FROM THIS BOOK

z The screen capture below shows the printer set-up for printing the pages in this book.
z The paper size is 11 X 17 (tabloid).
z The orientation is "LANDSCAPE".
z The "Pages to Print" selection is set to "List Only".
z The Picture should NOT be printed from this book.

IN THE MENU-BAR SELECT: "FILE / PRINT / PRINT BOOK" TO SEE THE ABOVE SCREEN.
This book is for printing "List" ONLY.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 00A001G ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
Print Note 7 Instructions 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


This is a "mini-book" that is used for printing only the "turn-pages".
It is NOT intended for ELECTRONIC viewing.
If you have inadvertently linked to this manual and wish to return to the service manual,
select the last selection under the "Print Note" menu at the top-center of the screen.
INSTRUCTION FOR PRINTING FROM THIS BOOK

z The screen capture below shows the printer set-up for printing the pages in this book.
z The paper size is 11 X 17 (tabloid).
z The orientation is "PORTRAIT".
z The "Pages to Print" selection is set to "Picture Only".
z The List or Document should NOT be printed from this book.

IN THE MENU-BAR SELECT: "FILE / PRINT / PRINT BOOK" TO SEE THE ABOVE SCREEN.
This book is for printing "Picture" ONLY.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 00A001H ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE MANUAL AND PARTS CATALOG...INTRODUCTION CONT'D 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


SERVICE MANUAL AND PARTS CATALOG
The SERVICE MANUAL provides instructions for operating, safety and preventive
maintenance, troubleshooting and repair. Each publication has its own table of contents that
lists the individual topics under the major subheadings.
The OPERATOR’S HANDBOOK provides a condensed version of machine specifications
and basic safety and operating instructions in paper format as a supplement to this electronic
manual.
LET PUBLICATIONS: General instructions on certain procedures or components which are
common to other types of machines manufactured by LeTourneau, Inc., are provided in short
technical publications. Examples of these publications are Field Welding Procedures, Safety
Wire Installation Procedures, etc. These publications are hyperlinked from within the sections
of the SERVICE MANUAL to which they apply or they can be accessed via the MANUALS icon
on the toolbar.
SIGNAL WORDS - SERVICE MANUAL: The SERVICE MANUAL contains special
instructions that pertain to safety, operation, maintenance and repair of the machine. These
instructions are indented within the text to draw reader attention to their importance. Listed
below are the signal words and symbols that precede these instructions and their meanings:

Important safety information - a hazard that COULD cause serious injury or


loss of life.

Important information that tells how to prevent damage to equipment or


how to avoid a situation that COULD cause minor injury.

Important information (that aids in the operation, maintenance and repair of


the machine) to which you should pay special attention.

The size of the physical electronic signal words and symbols as shown
electronically has no significance. As an ongoing effort to improve the
electronic screen version and the printed version of this manual, the size of
some signal words and symbols has been changed. This electronic change
in size does NOT reflect a lesser or greater importance of the signal words
or symbols used.
It is ESSENTIAL for both operators and maintenance personnel to read and understand each
of the publications prior to operating or performing maintenance procedures to the machine.
The PARTS CATALOG contains part numbers, illustrations and schematics to aid in ordering
parts from LeTourneau, Inc. to service and repair your machine.
Verify numbers of parts, tools, or material by using the PARTS CATALOG, or contact your
authorized LeTourneau, Inc. distributor for assistance. Do not order parts from the SERVICE
MANUAL. Items shown as "Optional" may not be available on all models.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A002 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE MANUAL AND PARTS CATALOG...INTRODUCTION CONT'D 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

The LeTourneau, Inc. instructional manuals DO NOT provide specific


maintenance instructions for the machine’s engine. Refer to the engine
manufacturer’s owner’s manuals available through each engine
manufacturer's website or through the closest authorized distributor.
Replacement engine filters are available through LeTourneau, Inc. Refer to
the Service Parts List in the first section of the PARTS CATALOG.

Placing the mouse cursor over some hyperlinks or graphics within this
manual might display a "screen tip" (depending on the user computer
configuration), example: NOTE, CAUTION, & WARNING signal word
graphics. The "tip" is only intended as a convenient display (or reminder)
of some information. "Screen tips" do NOT provide all information about
the item and might not appear for all illustrations. Before beginning any
work, review all work and safety procedures provided in this manual, by the
equipment owner and all other appropriate sources of information.

LeTourneau, Inc. cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might


involve a potential hazard. The warnings in this publication and on the
product are therefore not all inclusive. These rules will not apply to all
situations. If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique not
specifically recommended by LeTourneau, Inc. is used, the owner must be
satisfied that it is safe for all personnel. Also, ensure that the product will
not be damaged or made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance
or repair procedures chosen. Operating the machine on different job sites
and under various environments can create safety hazards unique to that
particular situation. If a dangerous situation develops under these
circumstances, only the alertness of the operator and his proficiency in
operating the machine are available to cope with the emergency.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A002 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING LETOURNEAU, INC...INTRODUCTION CONT'D 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING LETOURNEAU, INC.
We believe you will be delighted with the loader’s performance, and feel sure that the payback
on your investment will be a rapid one. Should you need to discuss some aspects of the
design as it relates to the capability of your machine, your distributor will be glad to assist you.
If additional information is needed, the distributor will contact the factory. In the unlikely event
you are unable to obtain the information in this manner, contact the LeTourneau, Inc. Product
Support Group in Longview, Texas by telephone at 903-236-6584 or by FAX at 903-236-6548.
Be sure to have handy the model and serial number, hourmeter reading, and in-service date of
the machine.
Finally, thank you for selecting LeTourneau, Inc. for the purchase of your new loader!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 000A003 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SECTION 1

GENERAL INFORMATION
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


GENERAL INFORMATION
LETOURNEAU, INC.
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES, OPERATOR TRAINING
AND MACHINE SPECIFICATIONS
OSL-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE OF THIS PUBLICATION
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES AND WARRANTY ADVISORIES
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES
TRACTION MOTORS AND AC GENERATOR
DRIVERS, HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AND PUMP DRIVE GEARBOX
LINCS COMPUTER SYSTEM DATA DOWNLOADS
OPERATOR AND SUPPORT PERSONNEL TRAINING
LETOURNEAU, INC. FACTORY SERVICE AND REPAIR TRAINING
LOADER MAJOR FEATURES
CAB AND CONTROL FEATURES
LETOURNEAU, INC. “LINCS” COMPUTER SYSTEM OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
HARDWARE
USER INTERFACE AND DIAGNOSTICS
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER SPECIFICATIONS
PROPULSION AND CONTROL
TIRES
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
GENERAL SERVICE DATA
OPERATOR ENVIRONMENT
BRAKING SYSTEMS
COOLING AIR SYSTEM
FRAME
INDEPENDENT STEERING AND HOIST SYSTEMS
OPERATIONAL DATA
STANDARD AND OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
L-1350 OPERATING CAPACITIES, WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
L-1350 COMPONENT APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS
L-1850 OPERATING CAPACITIES, WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A001 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


L-1850 COMPONENT APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS
L-2350 OPERATING CAPACITIES, WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS
L-2350 COMPONENT APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS
PROCEDURE TO WEIGH LETOURNEAU, INC. LOADERS
PREPARATION OF WEIGHING AREA AND SCALES
PREPARATION OF MACHINE TO BE WEIGHED
WEIGHING PROCEDURE
DOCUMENTING THE WEIGHING PROCESS
LETOURNEAU, INC. WORLDWIDE SERVICE AND REBUILD CENTERS – MINING
EQUIPMENT

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 1. HANDS-ON TRAINING LAB AT LONGVIEW, TEXAS TRAINING CENTER
Figure 2. ELECTRIC DRIVE SYSTEM
Figure 3. TYPICAL AC GENERATOR ASSEMBLY (Model 12B Shown)
Figure 4. MAJOR FEATURES
Figure 5. PANORAMIC VIEW OF OPERATOR’S CAB
Figure 6. REMOTE CONTROL MODULE
Figure 7. COMPUTER MONITOR AND COMPUTER KEYPAD PANEL
Figure 8. LINCS COMPUTER SCREENS
Figure 9. CARRY POSITION
Figure 10. TIP POSITION
Figure 11. FULL LIFT POSITION
Figure 12. LOADER WEIGHING DATA SHEET
Figure 13. LOADER STANDARD CONFIGURATION
SCOPE OF THIS PUBLICATION
GENERAL INFORMATION contains ESSENTIAL information for owners, maintenance
personnel and operators for warranty requirements, operator training and machine dimensions
and operating clearances. It is ESSENTIAL for all personnel associated with the machine to
become familiar with this information and the instructions contained in the other publications in
this manual BEFORE operating the machine.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES AND WARRANTY ADVISORIES
LeTourneau, Inc. loaders are warranted in accordance with the warranty policy contained in
this publication. The recommended operating and maintenance procedures set forth shall be
followed to assure warranty coverage is not jeopardized. Failure to comply with recommended
operating and maintenance procedures may void machine warranty.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A001 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


Any questions or problems relating to warranty policy or administration should be directed to
LeTourneau, Inc., P.O. Box 2307, Longview, Texas 75601, Attn: Product Support. Include the
model and serial number, in-service date of the machine, and hourmeter reading. We
especially draw your attention to the following advisories:

1. The use of non-recommended lubricants or the mixing of incompatible


lubricants may damage components and void the warranty. Refer to
LUBRICATION AND FLUID SPECIFICATIONS for recommended lubricants.
2. Modifications to, cutting, drilling or welding on the roll over protective structure
(ROPS) can reduce its effectiveness in a roll over situation and may void its
certification. Contact your authorized LeTourneau, Inc. distributor before
performing any of the above operations to the ROPS.
3. Welding procedures can damage the solid-state electronic controls for the
engine, machine, and fire suppression system (optional), and also the bearings
in mechanical components unless pre-cautions are taken. Before conducting
any welding repair, refer to FIELD WELDING PROCEDURES and contact your
authorized LeTourneau, Inc. distributor for assistance.
4. Under no circumstances should the owner attempt to disassemble a driver past
the instructions contained in this SERVICE MANUAL. Unauthorized
disassembly of components may void the warranty.
5. All driver, traction motor and generator repairs are to be made by a
LeTourneau, Inc. authorized repair facility. Unauthorized disassembly or repair
may void the warranty.

Disposal of used oil, hydraulic fluid and engine coolant is subject to federal,
state, and local environmental regulations. Dispose of these items properly
through approved reclamation facilities per applicable regulations. DO NOT
flush or pour these items into streams or sewer systems.
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES:
Break-in period service procedures, as outlined in SERVICE UPON RECEIPT
PROCEDURES, must be performed and a record of these services maintained. A BREAK-IN
PERIOD CHECKLIST is provided for this documentation.
TRACTION MOTORS AND AC GENERATOR:
The traction motors and AC generator must be maintained in accordance with the following
instructions that are located in this SERVICE MANUAL:
a. SERVICE UPON RECEIPT PROCEDURES.
b. TAKING CARE OF YOUR DC MOTOR.
c. MODULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES – POST BREAK-IN PERIOD,
500 HOUR ELECTRICAL PM
DRIVERS, HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AND PUMP DRIVE GEARBOX:
The drivers, hydraulic system and pump drive gearbox must be maintained in accordance with
the following instructions that are located in this SERVICE MANUAL:
a. DRIVER MAINTENANCE AND ROTATION.
b. BREAK-IN SERVICE PROCEDURES.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A002 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


c. MODULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES – POST BREAK-IN PERIOD.

An on-going oil analysis program for these components, with samples


collected every 500 hours, is mandatory to meet LeTourneau, Inc. warranty
requirements. Refer to LUBRICATING OIL ANALYSIS.

LINCS COMPUTER SYSTEM DATA DOWNLOADS


Monthly downloads of LINCS Computer System production, operational and loadweigh data
must be submitted to the LeTourneau, Inc. Product Support Department. Failure to deliver
these monthly reports may adversely affect warranty disposition. Contact your authorized
LeTourneau, Inc. distributor for assistance in this matter.
OPERATOR AND SUPPORT PERSONNEL TRAINING
It is ESSENTIAL that the operator(s) read the SERVICE MANUAL and be trained in the safe
and effective operation of the machine BEFORE operating the machine.
The machine’s load limits and clearances are found in GENERAL INFORMATION.
• Safety instructions and precautions are found in SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS and, where
required, throughout the other publications in the manual.
• Operating instructions are found in DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
• Service requirements and recommendations are found within each publication in the
SERVICE MANUAL.
• If after reading this manual you have questions or do not understand any
portions of the instructions, contact LeTourneau, Inc. or your distributor.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A002 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LETOURNEAU, INC. FACTORY SERVICE & REPAIR TRAINING & FIGURE 1 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


LETOURNEAU, INC. FACTORY SERVICE AND REPAIR
TRAINING
LeTourneau, Inc. Factory Service and Repair Training is available to equipment owners.
LeTourneau, Inc., Training Schools are designed to give students a detailed understanding of
electrical, hydraulic and mechanical systems and components, as well as prescribed methods
of routine maintenance, troubleshooting and repair. These classes can be taught in multiple
languages.
Our newly renovated training facility in Longview, Texas, emphasizes hands-on
troubleshooting. Fully operational simulators give students actual faultfinding and set-up
experience in both electrical and hydraulic systems. The hands-on training lab is shown in
illustration "HANDS-ON TRAINING LAB".
Facilities are designed for approximately 15 students, allowing for a more personal training
environment. During a factory school, students are not confined to the Training Center. Plant
tours and special visits to the factory are common.
This training can be conducted either in LeTourneau, Inc.’s Training Facility in Longview,
Texas, or at the customer’s site; however, “hands-on” is limited to machine availability when
taught at the customer’s location.
Service and repair training is highly recommended for operators and technicians to acquaint
them with the complexities of LeTourneau equipment. Contact your distributor or the
LeTourneau, Inc. Training Department in Longview, Texas, to arrange classes.

Figure 1. HANDS-ON TRAINING LAB AT LONGVIEW, TEXAS TRAINING CENTER

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A005 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER MAJOR FEATURES & FIGURE 2 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


LOADER MAJOR FEATURES
The LeTourneau, Inc. loaders are designed for rugged durability and operation in harsh
conditions. The loaders employ the LeTourneau Electric Drive System. The electric drive
system is essentially a self-contained prime mover consisting of three major assemblies: a
powerful electric traction motor, an epicyclic gear train called a driver and a wheel with a large,
high-floatation, wide-base tire. Refer to illustration "ELECTRIC DRIVE SYSTEM".
The LeTourneau Electric Drive System provides many advantages over conventional
mechanical drive systems:
• The electric drive system eliminates the need for transmissions, torque converters,
clutches and other power loss assemblies. Wheel speed and tractive effort is
infinity variable from zero to maximum RPM and controlled by the machine’s solid-
state power conversion system.
• The electric drive concept allows the engine to run at an optimum RPM that is
governed and relatively constant. This contributes to longer engine life and lower
fuel costs.
• The electric traction motors are powered by an AC generator that is driven by the
diesel engine. Refer to illustration "TYPICAL AC GENERATOR ASSEMBLY".
Illustration "MAJOR FEATURES" provides a brief description of some of the other features of
the L-1350, L-1850 and L-2350 Loaders.

MODEL J-2 DRIVE MOTOR USED FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES


Figure 2. ELECTRIC DRIVE SYSTEM

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A007 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 3 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Figure 3. TYPICAL AC GENERATOR ASSEMBLY (MODEL 12B SHOWN)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A008 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 4 1_2
REFER TO TA9942 FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION
Training only! Always use your 4.
Figure machine
MAJORoriginal documentation!
FEATURES

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A009 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation! LINCS Computer System: TA9942

Operational data, mechanical, electrical, electronic


Operator's Cab: Weather protection for the and hydraulic systems diagnostics are provided to NOTE:
operator is provided by an all steel cab mounted the operator and maintenance technicians on the
LeTourneau, Inc. LINCS computer system monitor. L-1350 used for illustrative purposes.
atop the rear frame. The cab is independently
rubber mounted separate from the ROPS L-1350/L-1850/L-2350 have same
structure to minimize vibration and sound features.
transmission. Filtered air enters the cab, which Operator Protection: The operator is protected
includes an automatic climate control system as by a Rollover Protective Structure (ROPS) and
standard equipment. Falling Object Protective Structure (FOPS).
Power Unit: A diesel engine and AC generator
provide power for smooth, no-spin-out, no-shift,
variable speeds forward and reverse.
Joysticks: Joysticks control steering and
hoist and bucket operation. The joysticks are
mounted on the operator seat armrests.

Steering: The articulated frame concept is used to give the


Rear Frame (also referred to as "Tow Unit"): The Loader maximum maneuverability. The pivot point is
rear frame carries the operator's cab, hydraulic approximately half way between the front and rear axles.
reservoir, SCR compartment, power unit, and the Hydraulic cylinders provide power for steering the machine.
L-1350
oscillating rear axle. There is constant steering response regardless of travel
speed, digging action or lift action. The 84° steering angle
allows for excellent maneuverability and a short turning
radius.
Front Frame: The front frame carries several major structural
components of the machine. The lift arms, bucket, hoist and
Structural Steel: High-quality bucket cylinders, and front axle are located on the front
structural steel is used frame.
throughout the machine.

Lift Arms: The lift arms are of


heavy welded box type
construction.

Electrical and Mechanical Braking Systems: The LeTourneau,


Inc. loaders employ, as the basic braking system, what is known
as regenerative or dynamic braking. When the operator releases
the accelerator pedal to the upright position, the solid state Ball Joints: Loaders manufactured by
conversion system signals a change in armature converter SCR LeTourneau, Inc., use pivot balls at the lift arms,
firing angles resulting in a reversal of power flow. Only the hoist cylinders, middle pivot and rear axle pivot. Electric Motor Drive System: Tractive power
machine's inertia keeps it in motion. As the wheels turn, the The ball joint assembly employs the use of two comes from four electric motors coupled to gear
drive motors become power generators. The reverse current is fed (halves) semi-spherical nickel-aluminum-bronze train and hub combinations called drivers.
behind AC generator to braking grids (located in front of the ball liner bushings. The ball liners are mounted One motor and driver per wheel. Wheel
radiator), where it is dissipated, causing the machine to come to a within the ball socket and ball cap and have low motor torque for all four wheels Bucket: The standard bucket capacities for the
friction, high output load carrying capacity as independently adjusts to job conditions. loaders are as follows:
smooth stop. The secondary braking system is an air-operated
required by these applications.
(L-1350/L-1850) or hydraulically-operated (L-2350) disc brake • L-1350 - 80,000 Lbs (36,288 kgs)
attached to each motor armature shaft. The third system, • L-1850 - 100,000 Lbs (45,360 kgs)
the parking brake, is a spring-applied, air release or hydraulic Independent Hoist System: Hydraulic metered • L-2350 - 160,000 Lbs (72,574 kgs)
(as applicable) parking brake. Oscillating Axle: The rear axle oscillates pilot-controlled hoist system is independent of the The bucket may be equipped with the LeTourneau,
vertically a total of 22° (11° on each side) on steering system utilizing single stage, double-acting Inc. Total Lip Coverage (TLC) System or the Esco
two ball joints assemblies, thus minimizing cylinders mounted on the front frame. Toplock, teeth and adapters per customer
alignment difficulties while maintaining overall
TA9942 specifications and requirements. The operator
machine stability on rough terrain.
does not have to level the bucket. All digitally
controlled loaders have a geometrically self-
leveling bucket.

TA9942
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 001A009 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
TABBLANK

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service information documents. Make sure
you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER TABLOID BLANK PAGE ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CAB AND CONTROL FEATURES & FIGURE 5 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


CAB AND CONTROL FEATURES
The cab and operator controls are designed to enhance operator comfort and to ensure
maximum productivity from the machine. These features include:
• Rubber-mounted, acoustically and thermally insulated cab
• 8-point adjustable ergonomic air-ride seat
• Filtered air supply to the cab
• Automotive style full climate control air conditioning and heating system with 12
independently adjustable outlets
• Linear and rotary transducers, replacing traditional limit switches, provide the operator
with smooth and precise control of the loader through its full range of motion
• A simplified operator interface, featuring joysticks and thumb switch controls, allows
the operator to control all aspects of the loader’s operation with a minimum amount of
hand and arm movements
• Responsive joystick steering
• Single stick hoist and bucket control
• Precision proportional and infinitely variable control of hoist, bucket and steering
• “Closed loop” controls assure operator commands are precisely executed regardless
of conditions
• Plain language computer screen messages inform the operator of any reason his
commands cannot be executed
• “Push and forget” button controls; speed loader operations by automatically and
accurately positioning the bucket

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A011 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CAB AND CONTROL FEATURES & FIGURE 5 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA-10140-8

TA-10142-8

TA-10141-8 HOIST AND BUCKET JOYSTICK


STEERING JOYSTICK CONTROL
Figure 5. PANORAMIC VIEW OF OPERATOR’S CAB

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A011 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LINCS COMPUTER SYSTEM OPERATION OVERVIEW & FIGURE 6 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


LETOURNEAU, INC. “LINCS” COMPUTER SYSTEM
OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
The loader features the LeTourneau, Inc. Integrated Network Control System (LINCS™).
LINCS™ is a Controller Area Network (CAN) system. The CAN protocol is an ISO standard
(ISO 11898) for serial data communication.
HARDWARE
LINCS™ manages all loader systems (including hydraulics, machine electrics, traction drive,
and engine) through the interactions of multiple Remote Control Modules (RCMs) and the
Master Control Module (MCM). The entire system is directed by the MCM, which combines
ruggedized industrial hardware with a Pentium class microprocessor and is located in the cab
of the loader. The RCMs are the “hands and eyes” of the system and are directly connected to
various input and output devices on the loader.
Each RCM utilizes a 32-bit microprocessor in an environmentally sealed enclosure, protected
against direct high-pressure hot water washes and drenching in vehicle fluids. Most of the
RCMs are located around the machine near the devices that each RCM controls and
monitors. There are three RCMs located inside the Controller, in the Converter Control
Cabinet and three RCMs located in the cab. Exact location of all RCMs is shown in illustration
"CAN CONNECTOR CABLE LAYOUT" (located in SCHEMATICS - beginning on page
022A001. All connections to the RCMs are made through gold-to-gold military style
connectors and are protected against reversed polarities and short circuits. All RCMs are fully
interchangeable, reducing inventory requirements, and are automatically programmed by the
MCM to perform the functions required of it. This interchangeability makes the servicing of the
RCMs a simple and quick pull-out/plug-in procedure. Refer to illustration "REMOTE
CONTROL MODULE".

Figure 6. REMOTE CONTROL MODULE

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A013 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LINCS COMPUTER SYSTEM OPERATION OVERVIEW & FIGURE 6 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

USER INTERFACE AND DIAGNOSTICS


LINCS™ provides operator interaction through a display screen, lights, audible alert and a
keypad located on the operator console in the cab. Refer to illustration "COMPUTER
MONITOR AND COMPUTER KEYPAD PANEL".
To keep the operator from being overloaded with information, LINCS™ uses three panel lights
(red, amber and blue) in conjunction with the main display screen to indicate the status/health
of the loader.
• Blue: Indicates a Planned Maintenance (PM) alert condition which does not affect the
operations of the loader, but which should be addressed at the next preventive
maintenance interval.
• Amber: Indicates a condition that needs attention and is accompanied by a “Warning”
message on the display screen. Pertinent action instructions are displayed with or
following the message.
• Red: Indicates a condition requiring immediate shutdown and is accompanied by an
“Alarm” message on the display screen.
In addition to the self-diagnostic routines that are constantly being run, LINCS™ runs detailed
start-up diagnostics to establish the health of the loader before it is operated.
While running normally, LINCS™ provides the operator with a display that shows the current
production and status information of the loader. This configurable screen allows the operator
to accurately gauge the bucket position and angle as well as keep track of individual bucket
weights and cycle times. The current production rate of the machine is also displayed to aid
the operator in maintaining production goals. Refer to illustration "LINCS™ COMPUTER
SCREENS".
If the operator attempts to perform an operation that LINCS™ will not allow, a “NOTICE”
screen, which provides information as to why the operation is not allowed, appears on the
computer monitor.
For detailed interrogation of the system, the operator can navigate the Graphical User
Interface (GUI) to access the various menus and display screens. Through this simple menu
interface, any channel on the system can be monitored and studied. And if desired, eight
different channels can be displayed on the main production screen in an easy to read strip-
chart format for troubleshooting purposes. Optional RF-modems allow this ability to be
extended to 64 channels, which can be monitored and recorded in a portable computer at
some distance removed from the loader.
Online access is provided through the menus to review the events that LINCS™ has logged. It
is also possible to extract the available logs from LINCS™ so that they can be studied back in
the office away from the machine, for analysis, troubleshooting, trending or reporting purposes.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A013 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 7 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


REFER TO TA-9918-8 FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION
1. PM ALERT LIGHT (BLUE)
2. WARNING LIGHT (AMBER)
3. ALERT LIGHT (RED)
4. KEYPAD
5. PARK BRAKE CONTROL
6. KEY SWITCH
7. MONITOR
Figure 7. COMPUTER MONITOR AND COMPUTER KEYPAD
PANEL

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A014 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

4 TA9918-8

1 2 3
5
2
4 5 6

7 8 9
OFF
ON

1 START
0
6

TA-9918-8

TA9918-8
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 001A014 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 8 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA-9936 TA-9934

TA-9933 TA-9932

TA-10137-8
TA-9937

TA-9935 TA-10152-8

Figure 8. LINCS COMPUTER SCREENS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A015 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER SPECIFICATIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER SPECIFICATIONS


LeTourneau Inc. has made every effort to make these specifications as accurate as possible at
the time of printing. However, we reserve the right to make changes and improvements at any
time, without notice, in equipment, materials and specifications. To ensure the most current
information, please contact your distributor representative. Data herein is applicable to models
L-1350, L-1850 and L-2350 unless specified individually. Refer only to the data applicable to
your machine when individually specified.
PROPULSION AND CONTROL
MACHINE ENGINE MODEL TYPE RATED CYLINDERS BORE DISPLACE-
MODEL POWER AND MENT
STROKE
Detroit Series 4-Cycle 1725 HP 6.5 in. X 2975 cu. in.
L-1350 Diesel 4000 Turbocharged/ (1193 kW Twelve (12) 7.5 in. (48.75
Aftercooled @ 1980 (165 mm liters)
ROM) X 190
mm)
Cummins QSK 45 1600 HP 6.26 in. X 2746 cu. in.
(1193 kW 7.5 in. (44.99
@ 1980 (159 mm liters)
RPM) X 190
mm)
Detroit Series 4-Cycle 2000 HP 6.5 in. X 3967 cu. in.
L-1850 Diesel 4000 Turbocharged/Low (1492 kW 7.48 in. (65 liters)
Temperature @ 1900 (165 mm
Aftercooled RPM) Sixteen (16) X 190
mm)
Cummins QSK 60 4-Cycle QSK 60 6.26 in. X 3672 cu. in.
Turbocharged/ Dual 7.48 in. (60.2 liters)
Aftercooled Stage (159 mm
w/Pre- X 190
lube mm)
2000 HP
(1492 kW
@ 1900
RPM)
Detroit Series 4-Cycle 6.5 in. X 3967 cu. in.
Diesel 4000 2300 HP Sixteen (16) 7.5 in. (65 liters)
L-2350 Turbocharged/ (1715 kW (165 mm
Aftercooled @ 1900 X 190
RPM) mm)
Cummins QSK 60 6.26 in. X 3672 cu. in.
7.48 in. (60.2 liters)
(159 mm
X 190
mm)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A017 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER SPECIFICATIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

RADIATOR/OIL COOLER
Model L & M MESABI Replaceable Tube Type, Split Flow Side by Side
Type Thermostatically Controlled, Independent Hydraulic Motor-Driven Radiator Fan
Fan Speeds Variable
L-1350: 101 gals (382 liters)
Capacity:
L-1850: 110 gals (416 liters)
L-2350: 120 gals (454 liters)

EXHAUST SYSTEM
Low Restriction Mufflers With Top, Rear Hood Discharge

24V DC SYSTEM
Batteries Four (4) 12-volt
Model 8D
Starter(s) Two (2) Delco-Remy Series 50 MT Type 400
Alternator 175-amp with Integral Voltage Regulator

CONTROLS: LeTourneau Integrated Network Control System


(LINCS™)
Hydraulics
Microprocessor Based Full Digital Control and Monitoring Electrics
Engine
Traction Drive
Modular Design
Built-in Diagnostics Screen Display and Keypad
No Contactors or
Power Switch Gear
Solid State Controlled Traction Drive
Infinitely Variable
Speed Control
Built-in Standby Power
Control

WEIGHT TO HORSEPOWER RATIO


L-1350 L-1850 L-2350
244 lbs.(110 kgs) 252 lbs.(114 kgs) 252 lbs.(114 kgs.)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A017 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

AC GENERATOR
MACHINE
MODEL MODEL TYPE EXCITATION FEATURE

L-1350 LeTourneau, 9B Generator


Alternating Current, Solid State Standby Power
L-1850 LeTourneau 12C 3-Phase, 4-Pole Capability
Generator
L-2350 LeTourneau 12C
Generator

TRACTION MOTORS
MACHINE MODEL TYPE NUMBER
MODEL
L-1350 LeTourneau M40 Traction Motor
Direct Current, 4-Pole, Shunt Four (4)
L-1850 LeTourneau J2 Traction Motor Wound
L-2350

DRIVE GEARING
In-line gear train-mounted within the rim of the tire, transmitting power from the traction
motor to the tire/rim assembly. Each driver unit consists of a planetary gear train, hub
structure, spindle structure, primary gearbox and a bearing carrier assembly with
independent onboard filtration.

MACHINE MODEL TOTAL FILTRATION


MODEL REDUCTION
L-1350 LeTourneau 51-B 92:1
10 Micron
L-1850 LeTourneau 57 99:1
L-2350

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A018 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TIRES
Standard Tires Standard Tires Ply Rating Standard Rims
74 PR 36 x 51
49/75 x 51
L-1350 Optional Tires Optional Tires Ply Rating Optional Rims
50/80 x 57 57 PR 36 x 57
52/80 x 57 57 PR 36 x 57
55/80 x 57 57 PR 44 x 57
Standard Tires Standard Tires Ply Rating Standard Rims
L-1850 53.5/85 x 57 (L-5) 76 PR 44 x 57
Optional Tire Optional Tire Ply Rating Optional Rim
55/80R X 57 (L-5) 76 PR 47 x 57
Standard Tires Standard Tires Ply Rating Standard Rims
L-2350
70/70 x 57 82 PR 60 x 57

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A018 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS...CONT'D...HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
PUMPS
L-1350 L-1850 L-2350
Bucket & Hoist Piston Pumps 375 GPM 500 GPM 500 GPM
Steering 90 GPM 90 GPM 63 GPM
Fan Drive 45 GPM 45 GPM 45 GPM
Blower 60 GPM 45 GPM 45 GPM
Auxiliary N/A 14 GPM 14 GPM
Independent Hydraulic Cooling System Vane Pump 110 GPM 110 GPM 100 GPM
PUMP DRIVE BOX
LeTourneau, Inc. Manufactured
Ratio 1:1

VALVES
MACHINE MAIN STEERING
MODEL
L-1350 Three 185 GPM Relief 3300 PSI One 90 GPM Relief 3400 PSI
(3) (700 Pressure (22,754 (1) (341 Pressure (23,443
l/min) kPa) l/min) kPa)
L-1850 175 GPM 3300 PSI 80 GPM 3400 PSI
(663 (22,754 (303 (23,443
l/min) kPa) l/min) kPa)
L-2350 185 GPM 4000 PSI 63 GPM 3400 PSI
(700 (27,580 (238 (23,443
l/min) kPa) l/min) kPa)

CYLINDERS
MACHINE HOIST BUCKET STEERING
MODEL
L-1350 Diameter and Stroke Diameter and Stroke 10.0 in x Diameter and Stroke 7.5
13.5 in x 74.5 in (343 mm 41.5 in (254 mm x 1054 mm) in x 30.0 in (190 mm x
x 1892 mm) 762 mm)
L-1850 Diameter and Stroke Diameter and Stroke (Standard Diameter and Stroke 7.5
15.0 in x 83.0 in (381 mm and High Lift) 12.5 in x 42.8 in in x 30.0 in (190 mm x
x 2108 mm) (318 mm x 1086 mm) 762 mm)
L-2350 Diameter and Stroke Diameter and Stroke 12.5 in x Diameter and Stroke 6.5
16.0 in x 83.0 in (406 mm 42.75 in (317 mm x 1086 mm) in x 30.0 in (165 mm x
x 2108 mm) 762 mm)

FILTERS
Full System Return Flow 10 Micron
Gearbox 10 Micron
Pump (Case Drain) 10 Micron

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A019 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS...CONT'D...GENERAL SERVICE 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
DATA

GENERAL SERVICE DATA

FLUID CAPACITIES
CRANKCASE
MACHINE FUEL HYDRAULIC COOLING (INCLUDES FILTERS) GEARBOX DRIVERS
MODEL TANK TANK SYSTEM DETROIT
CUMMINS
DIESEL
Approx. 36
L-1350 925 375 Gal. 101 Gal. 48 Gal. 58 Gal. 7 Gal. Gal. (136
Gal. (1418 L.) (382 L.) (182 L.) (219 L.) (26 L.) L.)
(3497
L.)

L-1850 1050 375 Gal. 110 Gal. 54 Gal. 50 Gal. 7 Gal. Approx. 25
Gal. (1419 L.) (416 L.) (204 L.) (189 L.) (27 L.) Gal.
(3970 (94.5 L.)
L.)
Approx. 25
1305 375 Gal. 120 Gal. 58 Gal. 60 Gal. 7 Gal. Gal.
L-2350
Gal.* (1418 L.) (454 L.) (219 L.) (227 L.) (26 L.) (94.5 L.)
(4939
L.)
*EARLY MODELS-1050 Gal. (3974 L.)

NOMINAL REPORTED FUEL CONSUMPTION – GALLONS/LITERS PER


HOUR
L-1350 L-1850 L-2350
32 – 42 Gal (121 – 159 Liters) 36 – 49 Gal (136 – 185Liters) 45 – 58 Gal (170 – 219 Liters)

OPERATOR ENVIRONMENT

CAB
Spacious, ergonomically designed operator’s cab is mounted directly
over the center articulation point, providing excellent visibility. The cab is
independently rubber mounted separate from the ROPS structure to
minimize vibration and sound transmission. Only filtered air enters the
pressurized cab, which includes air conditioning as standard, in addition
to the high output heater-defroster. Climate control vents are strategically
located throughout the cab. The bucket seat has adjustable air
suspension along with seat belts. Other standard features include joystick
steering, tinted glass, sun visor and full insulation for thermal and sound
dampening.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A020 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS...CONT'D...GENERAL SERVICE 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
DATA

STANDARD GAUGES AND INDICATORS


Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Engine Lube-Oil Pressure Gauge
Fuel Level Gauge
Hourmeter
Speedometer
System Air Pressure Gauge

STANDARD INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE ALARMS


Three warning lights and an audible alarm advise the operator of the
condition of the engine, hydraulic, electrical, and electronic systems of
the loader (RED, AMBER and BLUE). The operator is additionally
informed of a potential problem by text messages on a computer display.
The computer display also provides repair technicians with operational
and history data in the event of a loader malfunction.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A020 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS...CONT'D...BRAKING SYSTEMS 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


BRAKING SYSTEMS

PRIMARY BRAKING SYSTEM


Electric Braking (Retarding) is designed as the primary braking system.
Can be controlled from the accelerator or the retard/brake pedal. Solid-
state, no wearing parts braking system will bring the loader to a stop
without the application of the air or hydraulically-operated brakes used for
backup.

SERVICE, EMERGENCY AND PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM


Armature speed disc brakes, spring-actuated air release (L-1350-L-1850)
or hydraulic release (L-2350), automatic actuation on all four wheels in
the event of pressure loss.
COOLING AIR SYSTEM

Filtered Inlet Air Cools Control Box, AC Generator and Traction Motors
Function
Blower Backward Inclined Blade Fan
Drive Hydraulic Motor
Filter Make Self-cleaning, with KLENZ™ System

FRAME

L-1350
The frame structures are fabricated from high-strength, low-alloy steel
with excellent weldability and low temperature properties throughout.
The cast front axle is an integral, fixed part of the frame. The cast rear
axle is allowed to oscillate a total of ±11 degrees on the rear frame.
The independent power module mounting system is cradled within the
rear frame by a three-point isolation system.

L-1850-L-2350
The frame structures are fabricated from high-strength, low-alloy steel
with excellent weldability and low temperature properties throughout. The
front axle is an integral, fixed part of the frame. The rear axle is allowed to
oscillate a total of ±11 degrees on the rear frame.
The independent power module mounting system is cradled within the
rear frame by a three-point isolation system.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A021 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS...CONT'D...INDEPENDENT STEERING AND HOIST SYSTEMS 1_2

INDEPENDENT
Training only! Always use your STEERING
machine originalAND HOIST
documentation! SYSTEMS
INDEPENDENT HOIST SYSTEM
Both hoist and bucket control functions are incorporated into a single
joystick. Hydraulic metered pilot-controlled hoist system is independent
of the steering system utilizing single stage, double-acting cylinders
mounted outside of the front frame.

ARTICULATED POWER STEERING


Joystick controlled articulating frame — full-time hydrostatic power steering. The electric
drive, with its constant RPM, provides full steering response regardless of vehicle speed.

MACHINE OPERATING ARTICULATION ANGLE TURNING RADIUS


MODEL PRESSURE STANDARD LIFT HIGH
LIFT
L-1350 3400 psi 42° each side 40’-6” N/A
(23,442 kPa)
L-1850 3400 psi 42º each side 43’-0” 44’-1”
(23,442 kPa)
L-2350 3400 psi 42° each side 40’-6” N/A
(23,442 kPa)

OPERATIONAL DATA
INDEPENDENT HOIST SYSTEM
Hydraulic metered pilot-controlled hoist system is independent of the steering system
utilizing single stage, double-acting cylinders mounted outside of the front frame.
MACHINE MODEL HOIST DUMP FLOAT TOTAL TIME
L-1350 13 seconds 3 seconds 5 seconds 21 seconds
L-1850 14 seconds 4 seconds 6 seconds 24 seconds
L-2350 15 seconds 3 seconds 5 seconds 23 seconds

TRAVELING SPEED INFINITELY VARIABLE


MACHINE MODEL
L-1350 Forward and Reverse 0-10 MPH (0-16.09 Kph)
L-1850
Forward and Reverse 0-9 MPH (0-17.7 Kph)
L-2350

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A022 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS...CONT'D...STANDARD AND OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1_2

STANDARD
Training only! Always AND OPTIONAL
use your machine EQUIPMENT
original documentation!
STANDARD EQUIPMENT
Access Ladder Light Kit
Air Conditioning, Filtered and Pressurized
Air Dryer System
Air Horn
Air Start
Air Tank Bleed Kit
Ash Tray and Cigar/Cigarette Lighter
Automatic Adjustable Lift Height Cut Off
Automatic Bucket Leveling Device
Automatic Cabinet Lights
Automatic Lubrication System
Backup Alarm, Audible
Battery Disconnect Switch
Convex Mirrors
Door Interlock Kit
Drawbar
Dust Detectors, Engine Intake Air
Emergency Stop Kit – Cab and Remote Mounted
Engine Compartment Light
Five (5) Gallon Windshield Washer Reservoir
FOPS, Falling Object Protection System
Ground Fault Electrics
Heater-Defroster, High-Output
High, Low Idle Switch
Idle Timer
Illuminated Instrument Panel
Interior Lights
Joy Stick Bucket Controls
Joy Stick Steering
Ladder Walkway-Rear Access
LINCS™ - LeTourneau Integrated Network Controlled System
Manual Fire Extinguisher, 21 lbs. (9.53 kgs)
Maintenance Lockout Switch

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A023 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER SPECIFICATIONS...CONT'D...STANDARD AND OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 1_2

Mirror, Rearview
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
Overspeed Alarm
Parking Brake
Rear Tow Hitch
Rock Deflectors
ROPS, Rollover Protective Structure
Seat Belt
Standby Power Capability
Sun Visor
Tinted Safety Glass Throughout
Turn Signals
Twelve (12) Volt Power Supply
Windshield Wiper and Washer, Front and Rear
Work Lights, 110 Volt – 500 Watt (Cab) (6)

OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Air Clean-Out In Cab
Auxiliary Cab Heater, Water
Auxiliary Oil Cooler
Auxiliary Steering System
Central Service and Fast Fuel
Electric Cab Heater
Engine Heating System, Oil and Water
Fast Fuel
Fire Detection System
Fluid Sampling Kit
Grease Reservoir Heater
Hydraulic Tank and Battery Heater
Jumpstart Kit
Manual Fire Suppression System
Standby Power

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A023 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1350 OPERATING CAPACITIES, WEIGHTS & DIMENSIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

L-1350 OPERATING CAPACITIES, WEIGHTS, AND DIMENSIONS

DIMENSION TIRE OPTIONS


49/75-51 50/80-57 52/80-57 55/80R-57
Bucket Capacity 26 yd3 26 yd3 26 yd3 26 yd3
(19.88 m3) (19.88 m3) (19.88 m3) (19.88 m3)
Operating Payload 84,000 lbs.
(38,101 kgs)
Operating Payload w/High Lift 78,000 lbs.
(35,380 kgs)
Bucket Width 20 ft., 7 in. 20 ft., 7 in. 20 ft., 7 in. 20 ft., 7 in.
(6.27 m) (6.27 m) (6.27 m) (6.27 m)
Bucket Width with Deflectors 22 ft., 7 in. 22 ft., 7 in. 22 ft., 7 in. 22 ft., 7 in.
(6.88 m) (6.88 m) (6.88 m) (6.88 m)
Hinge-Pin Height 27 ft., 6 in. 28 ft., 2 in. 28 ft., 0 in. 28 ft., 4 in.
(8.38 m) (8.59 m) (8.53 m) (8.64 m)
Dump Clearance 45° Discharge 20 ft., 10 in. 21 ft., 6 in. 21 ft., 4 in. 21 ft., 8 in.
(6.35 m) (6.55 m) (6.50 m) (6.60 m)
Dump Clearance w/High Lift 23 ft.
(7.01 m)
Reach @ Full Lift 45° Discharge 9 ft., 4 in. 8 ft., 8 in. 8 ft., 10 in. 8 ft., 6 in.
(2.84 m) (2.64 m) (2.69 m) (2.59 m)
Digging Depth 1 ft., 3 in. 0 ft., 7 in. 0 ft., 9 in. 0 ft., 6 in.
(0.38 m) (0.18 m) (0.23 m) (0.15 m)
Height - Bucket Fully Raised 35 ft., 6 in. 36 ft., 2 in. 36 ft., 0 in. 36 ft., 4 in.
(10.82 m) (11.02 m) (10.97 m) (11.07 m)
Ground Clearance 1 ft., 6 in. 2 ft., 2 in. 2 ft., 1 in. 2 ft., 4 in.
(0.46 m) (0.66 m) (0.64 m) (0.71 m)
Overall Length Bucket Down 55 ft., 0 in. 55 ft., 0 in. 55 ft., 0 in. 55 ft., 0 in.
(16.76 m) (16.76 m) (16.76 m) (16.76 m)
Overall Length Carry Position 54 ft., 0 in. 54 ft., 0 in. 54 ft., 0 in. 54 ft., 0 in.
(16.46 m) (16.46 m) (16.46 m) (16.46 m)
Wheel Base 21 ft., 3 in. 21 ft., 3 in. 21 ft., 3 in. 21 ft., 3 in.
(6.48 m) (6.48 m) (6.48 m) (6.48 m)
Tread 14 ft., 7 in. 14 ft., 7 in. 14 ft., 7 in. 14 ft., 7 in.
(4.45 m) (4.45 m) (4.45 m) (4.45 m)
Width Outside Tires 18 ft., 9 in. 18 ft., 9 in. 18 ft., 11 in. 19 ft., 2 in.
(5.72 m) (5.72 m) (5.77 m) (5.84 m)
Height Over Cab 19 ft., 3 in. 20 ft., 0 in. 19 ft., 10 in. 20 ft., 1 in.
(5.87 m) (6.10 m) (6.05 m) (6.12 m)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A025 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1350 OPERATING CAPACITIES, WEIGHTS & DIMENSIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
Static Tipping Loads Straight 222,700 lbs. 231,000 lbs. 229,434 lbs. 235,273 lbs.
(101,017 kgs) (104,782 kgs) (104,071 kgs) (106,720 kgs)
Full 45° turn 187,130 lbs. 194,334 lbs. 192,950 lbs. 198,000 lbs.
(84,882 kgs) (88,150 kgs) (87.522 kgs) (89,813 kgs)
Breakout Force 220,000 lbs. 220,000 lbs. 220,000 lbs. 220,000 lbs.
(99,792 kgs) (99,792 kgs) (99,792 kgs) (99.792 kgs)
Operating Weight 390,000 lbs. 390,000 lbs. 390,000 lbs. 390,000 lbs.
(176,904 kgs) (176,904 kgs) (176,904 kgs) (176,904 kgs)
Operating Weight w/High Lift 395,000 lbs.
(179,168 kgs)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A025 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1350 COMPONENT APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS 1_2

Training only! AlwaysCOMPONENT


L-1350 use your machine original documentation! WEIGHTS
APPROXIMATE
NOTE: These weights are only approximate as a guide for determining proper lifting
procedures and equipment. These weights do not include liquids or external hardware in or on
the components.

ITEM/EQUIPMENT LBS. KGS.


ENGINE, CUMMINS 12,291 5575
ENGINE, DETROIT DIESEL 13,290 6028
POWER UNIT (ENGINE/GENERATOR) CUMMINS 21,491 9,748
POWER UNIT (ENGINE/GENERATOR) DETROIT DIESEL 24,500 11,113
BUCKET, WITH TEETH AND PINS 34,000 15,422
LIFT ARM STRUCTURE 42,000 19,051
BELLCRANK 3,850 1,746
LEVEL LINK 1,000 454
FRONT FRAME W/HOIST CYLINDER 65,000 29,484
REAR FRAME W/ENGINE/GENERATOR/REAR AXLE 102,200 45,449
HOIST CYLINDER 2,725 1,236
BUCKET CYLINDER 3,100 1,406
STEERING CYLINDER 940 426
TIRE AND RIM ASSEMBLY, 50/80 - 57 16,100 7,303
TIRE 9,100 4,128
RIM 7,000 3,175
DRIVER 9,100 4,128
MOTOR WITH BRAKE
M-40 4,650 2,109
B-40 4,600 2,087
MOTOR, DRIVER, BRAKE
M-40 13,750 6,237
B-40 13,600 6,169

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A027 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1350 COMPONENT APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS 1_2

Training only! Always useITEM/EQUIPMENT LBS. KGS.


your machine original documentation!
GENERATOR 9,200 4,173
HYDRAULIC TANK 2,000 907
HOOD STRUCTURE 4,000 1,814
REAR COWL 1,800 817
RADIATOR, OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY 4,000 1,814
REAR AXLE 10,000 4,536
HYDRAULIC PUMP GEARBOX 3,000 1,361
HUSCO VALVE 300 136
BLOWER/AIR CLEANER ASSEMBLY 2,200 998
MUFFLER 400 181
ELECTRICAL CONVERTER CABINET 4,000 1,814
ROLL BAR 8,000 3,629
CAB 2,000 907
GRID STRUCTURE W/GRIDS 800 363
BATTERIES 150 68

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A027 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1850 OPERATING CAPACITIES, WEIGHTS & DIMENSIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

L-1850 OPERATING CAPACITIES, WEIGHTS, AND DIMENSIONS

Standard High Lift


Bucket Capacity 33 yd3
(25.23 m3) 31 yd3 (23.70 m3)

Operating Payload 100,000 lbs. (45,360 kgs) 94,000 lbs. (42.638 kgs)

Bucket Width 21 ft 0 in. (6.40 m) 21 ft., 0 in. (6.40 m)

Bucket Width with Deflectors 22 ft., 0 in. (6.71 m) 22 ft., 0 in. (6.71 m)

Hinge-Pin Height 30 ft., 2 in. (9.20 m) 32 ft., 0 in. (9.75 m)

Dump Clearance 45° Discharge 22 ft., 0 in. (6.71 m) 24 ft., 0 in. (7.32 m)

Reach @ Full Lift 45° Discharge 9 ft., 0 in. (2.74 m) 9 ft., 0 in. (2.74 m)

Digging Depth 0 ft., 6 in. (0.31 m) 0 ft., 8 in. (0.24 m)

Height - Bucket Fully Raised 39 ft., 2 in. (11.95 m) 40 ft., 8 in. (12.44 m)

Ground Clearance 2 ft., 6 in. (0.79 m) 2 ft., 6 in. (0.79 m)

Overall Length Bucket Down 58 ft., 6 in. (17.83 m) 60 ft., 0 in. (18.29 m)

Overall Length Carry Position 56 ft., 10 in. (17.32 m) 58 ft., 2 in. (17.73 m)

Wheelbase 23 ft., 0 in. (7.01 m) 23 ft., 0 in. (7.01 m)

Tread 15 ft., 0 in. (4.57 m) 15 ft., 0 in. (4.57 m)

Width Outside Tires 19 ft., 2 in. (5.84 m) 19 ft., 2 in. (5.84 m)

Height Over Cab 20 ft., 8 in. (6.34 m) 20 ft., 2 in. (6.15m)

Straight 225,000 lbs. (102,060 kgs) 215,000 lbs. (97,524 kgs)


Static Tipping Loads
Full 42° Turn 200,000 lbs. (90,720 kgs) 190,000 lbs. (86,184 kgs)

Breakout Force 263,000 lbs. (119,297 kgs) 266,000 lbs. (120,658 kgs)

Operating Weight 506,000 lbs. (229,522 kgs) 511,000 lbs. (231,790 kgs)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A029 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1850 COMPONENT APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS 1_2

Training only! AlwaysCOMPONENT


L-1850 use your machine original documentation! WEIGHTS
APPROXIMATE
NOTE: These weights are only approximate as a guide for determining proper lifting
procedures and equipment. These weights do not include liquids or external hardware in or on
the components. Always allow a safety margin above these weights.

STANDARD LIFT HIGH LIFT


ITEM/EQUIPMENT LBS. KGS. LBS. KGS.
POWER UNIT, CUMMINS/DD 24,500 11,113 24,500 11,113

ENGINE, CUMMINS & DD - DRY 20,210 9,162 20,210 9,162


21-YD. BUCKET, W/TEETH AND PINS 45,000 20,412 45,000 20,412
28-YD. BUCKET, W/TEETH AND 55,000 24,954 55,000 24,954
PINS

LIFT ARM ASSEMBLY 60,000 27,216 60,000 27,216

BELLCRANK 6,800 3,084 6,800 3,084

LEVEL LINK 800 363 800 363

FRONT FRAME W/HOIST 74,000 33,566 74,000 33,566


CYLINDER

REAR FRAME W/ENGINE/GENERATOR/REAR AXLE 140,000 63,504 140,000 63,504

HOIST CYLINDER 5,300 2,404 5,300 2,404

BUCKET CYLINDER 2,300 1,044 2,700 1,225

STEERING CYLINDER 940 426 940 426

TIRE AND RIM ASSEMBLY, 53.5 X 17,000 7,711 17,000 7,711


57

TIRE, 50/80 - 57 9,500 4,309 9,500 4,309

RIM, 34 X 57 OR 45 X 51 3,200 1,452 3,200 1,452

RIM, 44 X 57 5,000 2,268 5,000 2,268

DRIVER 13,000 5,897 13,000 5,897

MOTOR, W/BRAKE 5,800 2,630 5,800 2,630

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A031 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1850 COMPONENT APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


ITEM/EQUIPMENT LBS. KGS.
MOTOR, DRIVER, BRAKE 18,800 8,527

GENERATOR 9,200 4,173

HYDRAULIC TANK 3,000 1,361

FUEL TANK 3,000 1,361

HOOD STRUCTURE 4,000 1,814

REAR COWL 1,800 817

RADIATOR, OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY 3,000 1,361

REAR AXLE 9,200 4,173

GEARBOX 3,000 1,361

HOIST AND BUCKET CONTROL 200 91


VALVE

BLOWER 400 181

MUFFLER 400 181

ELECTRICAL CONVERTER CABINET 4,000 1,814

ROLL BAR 7,800 3,538

CAB 2,000 907

GRID STRUCTURE W/GRIDS 800 363

BATTERIES 150 68

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A031 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-2350 OPERATING CAPACITIES, WEIGHTS, AND 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
DIMENSIONS

L-2350 OPERATING CAPACITIES, WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS

EARLY MODELS CURRENT MODELS

DIMENSION TIRES TIRES


70/70-57 70/70-57
Bucket Capacity 53 yd3 40 m3 53 yd3 40.52 m3
Operating Payload 160,000 lbs. 72,574 160,000 lbs. 72,574
Bucket Width 22 ft., 4 in. 6.81 22 ft., 4 in. 6.81
Bucket Width with Deflectors 25 ft., 6 in. 7.78 25 ft., 6 in. 7.78
Hinge-Pin Height 32 ft., 3 in. 9.83 32 ft., 6 in. 9.9
Dump Clearance 45° Discharge 24 ft., 0 in. 7.32 24 ft., 0 in. 7.3
Reach @ Full Lift 45° Discharge 12 ft., 5 in. 3.78 11 ft., 2 in. 3.40
Digging Depth 9 in. 0.23 6 in. 0.15
Height - Bucket Fully Raised 43 ft., 9 in. 13.33 43 ft., 9 in. 13.33
Ground Clearance 1 ft., 6 in. 0.46 1 ft., 6 in. 0.46
Overall Length Bucket Down 64 ft., 8 in. 19.71 66 ft., 2 in. 20.16
Overall Length Carry Position 62 ft., 0 in. 18.9 63 ft., 6 in. 19.35
Wheel Base 25 ft., 6 in. 7.77 25 ft., 10 in. 7.87
Tread 16 ft., 4 in. 4.98 16 ft., 5 in. 5.00
Width Outside Tires 22 ft., 2 in. 6.76 22 ft., 2 in. 6.76
Height Over Cab 21 ft. 6.45 21 ft. 6.4
Static Tipping Straight 320,000 lbs. 145,149 Kgs 308,276 lbs. 139,832 Kgs
Loads
Breakout Force 266,000 lbs. 120,658 289,000 lbs. 129,730
Kgs. Kgs.
Operating Weight 596,000 lbs. 270,340 578,000 lbs. 262,176
Kgs. Kgs.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A033 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-2350 COMPONENT APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

L-2350 COMPONENT APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS


NOTE: These weights are only approximate as a guide for determining proper lifting
procedures and equipment. These weights do not include liquids or external hardware in or on
the components.

STANDARD LIFT

ITEM/EQUIPMENT LBS. KGS.


ENGINE, CUMMINS 17,550 7,961
ENGINE, DETROIT DIESEL 16,000 7,257
POWER UNIT (ENGINE/GENERATOR) CUMMINS 27,450 12,451
POWER UNIT (ENGINE/GENERATOR) Detroit Diesel 25,900 11,748
BUCKET, WITH TEETH AND PINS 53-CU. YD. 70,250 31,865
LIFT ARM STRUCTURE 63,500 28,803
BELLCRANK 7,200 3,266
LEVEL LINK 850 386
FRONT FRAME W/HOIST CYLINDER 81,000 36,741
REAR FRAME W/ENGINE/GENERATOR/REAR AXLE 154,000 69,853
HOIST CYLINDER 5,560 2,522
BUCKET CYLINDER 2,900 1,316
STEERING CYLINDER 940 426
TIRE AND RIM ASSEMBLY 22,000 9,979
TIRE 70/70-57 15,300 6,940
RIM 60 X 57 6,700 3,039
DRIVER 13,000 5,897
MOTOR WITH BRAKE 5,800 2,630
MOTOR, DRIVER, BRAKE 18,800 8,527

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A035 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-2350 COMPONENT APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

ITEM/EQUIPMENT LBS. KGS.


GENERATOR 9,900 4,491
HYDRAULIC TANK 2,000 907
HOOD STRUCTURE 2,000 907
REAR COWL 2,250 998
RADIATOR, OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY 4,000 1,814
REAR AXLE 11,000 4,989
HYDRAULIC PUMP GEARBOX 3,000 1,361
HUSCO VALVE 300 136
BLOWER/AIR CLEANER ASSEMBLY 2,615 1,186
MUFFLER 400 181
ELECTRICAL CONVERTER CABINET 4,000 1,814
ROLL BAR 7,800 3,538
CAB 2,000 907
GRID STRUCTURE W/GRIDS 800 363
BATTERIES 150 68

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A035 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
PROCEDURE TO WEIGH LETOURNEAU, INC. LOADERS & FIGURE 9 1_2

PROCEDURE
Training only! Always TO WEIGH
use your machineLETOURNEAU,
original documentation! INC. LOADERS
The following procedure is designed to provide an accurate weighing of the loader and
conform to SAE definitions. This procedure is provided to assist with tire specifications and
LINCS™ load weighing calibrations.
PREPARATION OF WEIGHING AREA AND SCALES
a. Ensure scales have sufficient capacity to withstand the loaded front axle mass of the
loader. Ensure scales are adequate to handle 80% of listed machine mass. Refer to
L-1350, L-1850, L-2350 COMPONENT APPROXIMATE WEIGHTS in this publication.
b. Scales used for weighing to be installed and calibrated to the requirements of the scale
manufacturers. Calibration date and error curves are to be provided.
c. Scales to be positioned to allow machine weights to be taken with machine frame level,
both fore and aft, and side to side. Surface to be a hard-packed area, offering minimal
rolling resistance.
d. An area adjacent to the scales must be provided to enable the machine to be turned
around, enabling the weights to be recorded in opposing directions.
PREPARATION OF MACHINE TO BE WEIGHED
a. Machine is to be thoroughly cleaned and all bucket hang-up is to be completely
removed.
b. Machine is to be charged with a full fuel load and all systems up to the operating fluid
levels.
c. Tire pressures to be to manufacturer’s specifications.
d. The machine operator should remain onboard during all weight readings.
WEIGHING PROCEDURE
a. Three (3) different bucket positions are used with weighing the loader. The definitions
are:
CARRY POSITION

• The bucket is rolled back to the stops.


• The lift arms are raised to give a 15° approach angle under the bucket to the front
tire, tangent to the tire contact point. This is approximately 4 feet (1.2 m) from
bucket pivot pin to ground level.
Figure 9. CARRY POSITION

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A037 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
PROCEDURE TO WEIGH LOADERS...CONT'D & FIGURES 10 & 11 1_2

TIP POSITION
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

• The bucket is rolled back to the stops.


• The lift arms are raised to position the bucket pivot pin level with the lift arm pivot
ball.
Figure 10. TIP POSITION

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A038 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
PROCEDURE TO WEIGH LOADERS...CONT'D & FIGURES 10 & 11 1_2

Training
FULL LIFTonly! Always use your machine original documentation!
POSITION

• The bucket is rolled back to the stops.


• The lift arms are raised to the maximum lift height (hoist detent cut-out).
Figure 11. FULL LIFT POSITION

b. The loader is weighed first facing in one direction, and then turned around 180°and
weighed again.
c. The loader is weighed in each position, and in each direction, first with an empty bucket,
then with a loaded bucket. The load in the bucket is to be as close to the machine-rated
load as possible, up to a maximum of ± 5%.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A038 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
PROCEDURE TO WEIGH LOADERS...CONT'D & FIGURES 10 & 11 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

1. The loader load weigh system should be calibrated and used to


establish the bucket load weight.
2. The same bucket load should be used for all recorded weights.
DOCUMENTING THE WEIGHING PROCESS
The Loader Weighing Record Chart provides the fields to be recorded during the weighing
process.

The chart must be completed in full to be a valid weight record. The chart
can be printed from the DVD on 8-1/2 x 11 or A4 paper.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A038 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 12 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Loader Weighing Data Sheet


Unit of
measure US Short
(Select One) Ton 2000 Lbs. 907 Kgs.
Imperial Ton 2240 Lbs. 1016 Kgs.
Metric Tonne 2204 Lbs. 1000 Kgs.
Serial
Machine Details Model Number Hours Date Time Fuel %

Calibration
Scale Details Owner Make Model Capacity Date

Front Axle Rear Axle Subtotals


Position Bucket Direction Left Right Left Right Front Axle Rear Axle Total Averages
Carry Empty Left to Right
Tip Empty Left to Right
Full Lift Empty Left to Right
Carry Empty Right to Left
Tip Empty Right to Left
Full Lift Empty Right to Left
Carry Loaded Left to Right
Tip Loaded Left to Right
Full Lift Loaded Left to Right
Carry Loaded Right to Left
Tip Loaded Right to Left
Full Lift Loaded Right to Left
Payload

Weighing Technician Name Company Signature

Notes: This document must be completed in full. Date Completed Time Completed
Attach copies of scale calibration curves to this data sheet.
Figure 12. LOADER WEIGHING DATA SHEET

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A039 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 13 1_2
SEE ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 001A041 (p)
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
L-1350 TOP VIEW WITH TIRES AS INDICATED
TIRES 49/75 X 51 52/80 X 57 50/80 X 57 50/80 X 57
(A) 14 ft. 7 in. (4.45 m) 14 ft. 7 in. (4.45 m) 14 ft. 7 in. (4.45 m) 14 ft. 7 in. (4.45 m)
(B) 18 ft. 9 in. (5.72 m) 18 ft. 11 in. (5.77 m) 18 ft. 9 in. (5.72 m) 19 ft. 2 in. (5.84 m)
(C) 20 ft. 7 in. (6.27 m) 20 ft. 7 in. (6.27 m) 20 ft. 7 in. (6.27 m) 20 ft. 7 in. (6.27 m)

L-1850 TOP VIEW WITH 53.5/85 X 57 TIRES


(A) 15 ft. 0 in. (4.57 m)
(B) 19 ft. 5 in. (5.92 m)
(C) 21 ft. 0 in. (6.40 m)

L-2350 TOP VIEW WITH 70/70 X 57 TIRES


(A) 16 ft. 4 in. (4.98 m)
(B) 22 ft. 2 in. (6.76 m)
(C) 22 ft. 4 in. (6.81 m)

Dimensions shown are subject to change and vary in actual use due to tire
deflection. The simplified drawing is intended for reference only. If exact
dimensions are needed for the machine, field inspections and
measurements should be taken as required.

SEE TA-9311B FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION

L-1350 SIDE VIEW WITH TIRES AS INDICATED


TIRES 49/75 X 51 52/80 X 57 50/80 X 57 55/80R X 57
(A) 35 ft. 6 in. (10.82 m) 36 ft. 0 in. (10.97 m) 36 ft. 2 in. (11.02 m) 36 ft. 4 in. (11.07 m)
(B) 27 ft. 6 in. (8.38 m) 28 ft. 0 in. (8.53 m) 28 ft. 2 in. (8.59 m) 28 ft. 4 in. (8.64 m)
(C) 20 ft. 10 in. (6.35 m) 21 ft. 4 in. (6.50 m) 21 ft. 6 in. (6.55 m) 21 ft. 8 in. (6.60 m)
(D) 9 ft. 4 in. (2.84 m) 8 ft. 10 in. (2.69 m) 8 ft. 8 in. (2.64 m) 8 ft. 6 in. (2.59 m)
(E) 1 ft. 3 in. (0.38 m) 0 ft. 9 in. (0.23 m) 0 ft. 7 in. (0.18 m) 0 ft. 6 in. (0.16 m)
(F) 1 ft. 6 in. (0.46 m) 2 ft. 1 in. (0.64 m) 2 ft. 2 in. (0.66 m) 2 ft. 4 in. (0.71 m)
(G) 21 ft. 3 in. (6.48 m) 21 ft. 3 in. (6.48 m) 21 ft. 3 in. (6.48 m) 21 ft. 3 in. (6.48 m)
(H) 55 ft. 0 in. (16.76 m) 55 ft. 0 in. (16.76 m) 55 ft. 0 in. (16.76 m) 55 ft. 0 in. (16.76 m)
(I) 19 ft. 3 in. (5.87 m) 19 ft. 10 in. (6.05 m) 20 ft. 0 in. (6.10 m) 20 ft. 1 in. (6.12 m)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A041 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 13 1_2

Training only! AlwaysL-1850 SIDE


use your VIEW original
machine WITH 53.5/85 X 57 TIRES
documentation!
TIRE STANDARD HIGH LIFT
Bucket 33 yd3 (25.23 m3) Bucket 31 yd3 (23.70 m3)
(A) 39 ft. 2 in. (11.95 m) 40 ft. 8 in. (12.44 m)
(B) 30 ft. 2 i. (9.20 m) 32 ft. 0 in. ((9.75 m)
(C) 22 ft. 0 in. (6.71 m) 24 ft. 0 in. (7.32 m)
(D) 9 ft. 0 in. (2.74 m) 9 ft. 0 in. (2.74 m)
(E) 0 ft. 6 in. (0.15 m) 0 ft. 8 in. (0.24 m)
(F) 2 ft. 6 in. (0.79 m) 2 ft. 6 in. (0.79 m)
(G) 23 ft. 0 in. (7.01 m) 23 ft. 0 in. (7.01 m)
(H) 58 ft. 6 in. (17.83 m) 60 ft. 0 in. (18.29 m)
(I) 20 ft. 11 in. (6.68 m) 20 ft. 11 in. (6.68 m)

L-2350 SIDE VIEW WITH 70/70 X 57 TIRES


TIRES
(A) 43 ft. 4 in. (13.21 m)
(B) 32 ft. 3 in. (9.83 m)
(C) 24 ft. 0 in. (7.32 m)
(D) 12 ft. 5 in. (3.78 m)
(E) 0 ft. 9 in. (.23 m)
(F) 1 ft. 6 in. (.46 m)
(G) 25 ft. 6 in. (7.77 m)
(H) 64 ft. 8 in. (19.71 m)
(I) 21 ft. (6.4 m)

Figure 13. LOADER STANDARD CONFIGURATION

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A041 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LETOURNEAU, INC. WORLDWIDE SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS 1

Training only! Always use your


LETOURNEAU, INC.machine original documentation!
WORLDWIDE SERVICE AND REBUILD CENTERS MINING
EQUIPMENT
The following list of dealers and rebuild centers is provided to assist the owner in obtaining service and parts when and where
required worldwide. This list is accurate at the time of printing but is subject to change without notice. LeTourneau, Inc. strongly
recommends contacting the facilities listed herein by phone prior to shipment of any components for repair or rebuild. Verify that
the facility can handle the needed repair or rebuild, time frame for completion of repair or rebuild, and shipping instructions.

Country Name Mailing Address Physical Telephone Fax Additional


Address Comments
LETOURNEAU, INC. SALES AND SERVICE COMPANY:
USA Tucson, Arizona 6393 S. Campbell Same (520) 294- (520) 294- Authorized
Branch Ave. 6600 7680 Rebuild
Tucson, AZ 85706- (800) 648- Center
4441 4599
USA Gillette, Wyoming 3201 LeTourneau Dr. Same (307) 686- (307) 686-
Branch Gillette, WY 82718 1808 1833
USA Elko, Nevada Branch 582 West Cedar St. Same (775) 738- (775) 738-
Elko, NV 89801-2968 1735 1785
USA Farmington, New 2800 Inland St. Same (505) 327- (505) 325-
Mexico Branch Farmington, NM 7462 1677
87401-1842
CONSTRUCTION MACHINERY, INC.:
USA Construction 5400 Homer Dr. Same (907) 563- (907) 563-
Machinery Anchorage, AK 99518 3822 1381
(800) 478-
3822
USA Construction 2615 20th Ave. Same (907) 455- (907) 455-
Machinery Fairbanks, AK 99709 9600 9700
Fairbanks Branch

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A043 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LETOURNEAU, INC. WORLDWIDE SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS 1

HEAVY MACHINERY,
Training only! AlwaysINC.:
use your machine original documentation!
USA HMI Electric 3980 Pilot Ave. Same (800) 432- (901) 260- Authorized
Memphis, TN 38118 8904 2351 Rebuild
(901) 260- Center
2340
USA Green Bay, 1850 Elkay Ln. Same (920) 468- (920) 468-
Wisconsin Branch Green Bay, WI 54302 5940 5950
USA Rhinelander, P.O. Box 1526 627 Coon St. (715) 369- (715) 369-
Wisconsin Branch Rhinelander, WI Rhinelander, WI 1250 2993
54501 (800) 222-
1553
USA St. Albans, West P. O. Box 430 100 Smiley Dr. (800) 362- (304) 755-
Virginia Branch St. Albans, WV 25177 St. Albans, WV 3761 1047
(304) 755-
7000
USA Bangor, Maine 1576D Hammond St. Same (207) 842- (207) 942-
Branch Bangor, ME 04401 0050 1007
USA Charlotte, North P. O. Box 26663 3719 Rose Lake (704) 375- (704) 375-
Carolina Branch Charlotte, NC 28221- Dr. 2994 2998
6663 Charlotte, NC (800) 654-
28217 3395
USA Chicago, Illinois 5312 West 123rd Same (708) 371- (708) 371-
Branch Place 4343 4383
Alsip, IL 60658
P & H MINE PRO SERVICES:
USA P & H Mine Pro P.O. Box 158A 3621 15th Ave. (218) 262- (218) 262-
Services Hibbing, MN 55746- East 3837 6323
0158 Hibbing, MN (800) 485-
55746 8692

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A043 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LETOURNEAU, INC. WORLDWIDE SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS 1

ATELIERS WOOD,
Training only! INC.:
Always use your machine original documentation!
Canada Ateliers Wood, Inc. 361 Ave Noel Same (418) 962- (418) 962- Authorized
Sept-lIes, Quebec 6131 1862 Rebuild
G4R 1L8 Canada Center
DELSTAR:
Canada Delstar 13065 Jean Grou Same (514) 642- (514) 642- Authorized
Montreal, Quebec 8220 8095 Rebuild
H1A 3N6 Canada Center

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A043 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1
Country Name Mailing Address Physical Telephone Fax Additional
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
Address Comments
WAJAX INDUSTRIES LIMITED – Canada:
Canada Calgary, Alberta P.O. Box 5866 Station 5735 – 53rd St. (403) 279- (403) 236-
Branch “A” S.E. 7278 4071
Calgary, Alberta T2H Calgary, Alberta
2N4 Canada T2C 4V1
Canada
Canada Campbell River, 3125 N. Island Hwy. Same 9250) 287- 9250) 287- After hours
British Columbia Campbell River, B.C. 7177 7988 Parts
Branch V9W 7L9 Canada Emergency:
(250) 287-1122
After hours
Service
Emergency:
(250) 287-1133
Canada Dartsmouth, Nova 151 Thornhill Dr. Same (902) 468- (902) 468-
Scotia, Dartsmouth Dartsmouth, Nova 7352 3524
Branch Scotia B3B 1S2
Canada
Canada Edmonton, Alberta 16745 – 111th Ave. Same (780) 487- (780) 481- Authorized
Branch Edmonton, Alberta 6700 2458 Rebuild Center
T5M 2S4 Canada (902) 430-
8943 (24-Hour
Parts)
Canada Fort McMurray, 255 MacAlpine Same (780) 791- (780) 791-
Alberta Branch Crescent 6447 5178
Fort McMurray,
Alberta T9H 4A5
Canada
Canada Grand Prairie, 11501 – 89th Ave. Same (780) 538- (780) 538-
Alberta Branch Grand Prairie, Alberta 3440 3450
T8V 5Z2 Canada

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A044 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1

Canada
Training Kamloops,
only! AlwaysBritish 1880 Kryczka
use your machine Place
original Same
documentation! (250) 374- (250) 374-
Columbia Branch Kamloops, B.C. V1S 5055 8775
1S4 Canada
Canada Lachine, Quebec 1100 Norman St. Same (514) 639- (514) 639-
Branch Lachine, Quebec H8S 2216 7564
1A6 Canada
Canada Langley, British 9087E – 198th St. Same (604) 513- (604) 513-
Columbia Branch Langley, B.C. V1M 2216 1916
3B1 Canada
Canada Mississauga, 3280 Wharton Way Same (905) 624- (9035) 629-
Ontario Branch Mississauga, Ontario 5611 8339
L4X 2C5 Canada
Canada Nanaimo Branch 20938 S. Wellington Same (250) 755- (205) 755-
Nanaimo, B.C. Rd. 2005 1244
Nanaimo, B.C, V9S
1R5 Canada
Canada Prince George, 1140 Pacific St. Same (250) 562- (250) 561-
British Columbia Prince George, B.C. 7321 1404
Branch V2N 5S3 Canada
Canada Quebec City, 205 Boul St. – Same (418) 681- (418) 681-
Quebec Branch Sacrement 3555 9199
Quebec City, Quebec
G1N 3X5 Canada
Canada Saskatoon 319 – 47th St. East Same (306) 934- (306) 933-
Saskatchewan Saskatoon, 2858 0187
Branch Saskatchewan S7K
5H2 Canada
Canada Sparwood Branch RR1 Same (250) 425- (250) 425-
675 Michel Creek Rd. 9900 9944
Sparwood, B.C. V0B
2G0 Canada

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A044 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1

WAJAX INDUSTRIES
Training only! AlwaysLIMITED
use your–machine
Canada:original documentation!
Canada Terrace, British 3830 Sharples Rd. Same (250) 638- (250) 638-
Columbia Branch Terrace, B.C. V8G 1850 1895
5P8 Canada
Canada Wabash, Wabash Industrial Same (709) 282- (709) 282-
Newfoundland Park 3626 3108
Branch P.O. Box 670
Wabash,
Newfoundland A0R
1B0 Canada
Canada Winnipeg, Manitoba 75 Aimes Rd. Same (204) 694- (204) 694-
Branch Winnipeg, Manitoba 5266 5317
R3X 1V4 Canada

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A044 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1
Country Name Mailing Address Physical Telephone Fax Additional
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
Address Comments
INTERNATIONAL DEALERS:
Angola See France – Same
ODM
Argentina P & H Mine Pro Maipu 712 Piso 4 Same (54)(11) 4322-0696
Services Of. D
Buenos Aires,
Argentina
Australia Dowding & Mills 342 S. Pine Rd. Same (61)(7) 3205-3233 (61)(7) 3881- Authorized
Pty, Ltd. Brendale, QLD 1790 Rebuild
4500 Australia Center
Australia Dowding & Mills 9 Nelson Rd. Same (61)(2) 4954-7477 (61)(2) 4956- Authorized
Cardiff, NSW 2285 5163 Rebuild
Australia Center
Australia George Gilbert 15 Gosport St. Same (61)(7) 3890-1488 (61)(7) 3890- Authorized
& Company Hemmant, QLD 1588 Rebuild
4174 Australia Center
Australia LeTourneau Level 5 Unit 11/209 Level 5: Level 5:
Australia Pty. 303 Coronation Robinson Rd. (61)(7) 3368-2038 (61)(7) 3368-
Ltd. Dr. Geebung, Unit 11/209: 2043
P.O. Box 1405 Queensland (61)(7) 3865-2827 Unit 11/209:
Milton, 4034 Australia (61)(7) 3865-
Queensland 4064 2518
Australia
Australia Transfield 23 King Edward Same (61)(8) 9446-6444 (61)(8) 9446- Authorized
Technologies Rd. 6432 Rebuild
Osborne Park, WA Center
6017 Australia

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A045 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1
Country Name Mailing Physical Telephone Fax Additional Comments
Training only! Always use your machine
Addressoriginal documentation!
Address
INTERNATIONAL DEALERS:
Belgium BIA Rameistraat Same (32)(2) 689.28.11 (32)(2) Territory: Belgium,
123 589.28.29 Grand Duchy of
B-3090 Luxembourg, Zaire,
Overijse Rwanda, Burundi,
Belgium Congo Republic
Botswana See South Africa
– P & H Mine Pro
Services
Brazil SRR- Ave. Senador Same (55)(21) 471- (55)(21) 471- Authorized Rebuild
Equipmentatos Vitorino Freire, 3233 4019 Center
LTDA/RIMI 280-Fazenda
Division Botagogo CEP
21530-220 –
Rio de Janeiro
– RJ – Brazil
Burundi See Belgium –
BIA
Chile P & H Chile, S.A. Av. Presidente Same (56)(2) 620-8100 (56)(2) 620- Authorized Rebuild
(a subsidiary of Eduardo Frei or 8111 or Center
Harnischfeger Montalva (56)(2) 620-8106 (56)(2) 624-
Company) #6239 0690
Santiago Branch Conchali
Santiago, Chile
Chile P & H Chile, S.A. Pedro Aquirre Same (56)(55) 23-3449 (56)(55) 23- Authorized Rebuild
(a subsidiary of Cerda 6551 2809 Center
Harnischfeger Antofagasta,
Company) Chile
Antofagasta
Branch

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A046 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1

Chile P&H
Training only! Chile,use
Always S.A.yourManzana
machine9originalSame (56)(57) 413083
documentation! (56)(57)
(a subsidiary of Galpon 77 – 78 423609
Harnischfeger Iquique-Zofri
Company) Chile
Iquique-Zofri
Branch
Chile P & H Chile, S.A. Balmaceda Same (56)(55) 332591 (56)(55)
(a subsidiary of 4413 332589
Harnischfeger Calama
Company) Chile
Calama Branch
China Pamic Industries, Head Office: (908) 753-8181 (908) 756-6049
Inc. 22 Winchester Dr.
Scotch Plains, NJ 07076
Same
Beijing Office: (86)(10) 6599- (86)(10) 6599-
Nuapu Plaza, Room 924 2372 2371
No.19 Zhaoui da Street
Zhayang District 100020
Beijing, China
Same

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A046 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1
Country Name Mailing Address Physical Telephone Fax Additional
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
Address Comments
INTERNATIONAL DEALERS:
Colombia E. McAllister Calle 75 No. 11-74 Same (57)(1) 217-3300 (57)(1) 212-7060
& CIA. LTDA Bogotá, Colombia
Bogotá
Branch
Colombia E. McAllister Carrera 54 No. 72- Same (57)(5) 368-7752 Authorized
& CIA. LTDA 80 Rebuild Center
Barranquilla Cenatro Ejecutivo
Branch I. oficina 42
Barranquilla,
Colombia
Congo See Belgium (57)(5) 368-7753
Republic – BIA (57)(5) 356-0864
(57)(5) 356-2891
(57)(5) 358-1191
Egypt SITCO 18, Abdel Moneim Same (20)(2) 349-2824/ (20)(2) 748-3065
Riad St. P.O. Box 337-0910/761-
151, Dokki 12311 6654/748-0677
Mohandeseen
Cairo, Egypt
England P & H Mine P.O. Box 12 – Same 9011-44-1942- 9011-44-1942-
Pro Services Seaman Way 61.4400 61.4419
Harnischfeger Ince Wigan
U.K. Ltd. WNI 3DD, England
France ODM BP 140 Same (33) 4900-32-06- (33) 490-32-92- Territory:
Les Jardins de 21 06 France,
Farques Mauritania, Iran,
84133 le Pontet Angola
Cedex, France Authorized
Rebuild Center

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A047 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1

Greece Damko
Training only! 209,machine
Always use your Kifissiasoriginal
Ave. documentation!
Same (30)(1) 614- (30)(1) 614-0371
Energy, S.A. 15124 Maroussi 1106/115 or 614-0372
(a subsidiary Athens, Greece
of
Copelouzos
Group)
(NOT AN
AUTHORIZED
DEALER)
India Voltas NKM International Same (91)(022) 283- (91)(022) 283-
Limited House Backbay 6568 3582
Reclamation (91)(022) 202-
Mumbae 400 020 1573
India (91)(022) 202-
6212
Iran See France – Same
ODM
Israel Levinson P.O. Box 390 33 Hahashmal (972)(3) 710-6225 (972)(3) 560-
Bros. Tel Aviv, Israel St. 4540
Engineers 61033 Tel Aviv, Israel
Ltd. 61033
Japan Itochu Tsukamoto Same (81)(3) 3242-5321 (81)(3) 3242-
Corporation Building, 7F 1-6-5, 5333
Honcho,
Nihombashi Chou-
ku, Tokyo 103-
0023 Japan
Japan Construction PARTS ONLY: Same (81)(3) 3668-6121 (81)(3) 3668-
Machinery 4-1, Kofune-cho, 6196
Techno Nihombashi
Service Co. Chou-ku, Tokyo,
Ltd. Japan

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A047 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1

Kenya SeeAlways
Training only! South use your machine original documentation!
Same
Africa – P &
H Mine Pro
Services
Mauritania See France – Same
ODM

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A047 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1
Country Name Mailing Address Physical Telephone Fax Additional
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
Address Comments
INTERNATIONAL DEALERS:
Mexico Ameco Carr. Monterrey – Same (52)(8) 390- (52)(8) 388-
Services, S. DE Saltillo Km 67 #1200 1800 2078
R.L. DE C.V. Santa Catarina
(Monterrey), Nuevo
Leon, C.P. 66357,
Mexico
Mexico Ameco B. Lopez Mateos Same STET (52)(12) 15-
Services, S. DE No. 1000 2773
R.L. DE C.V. Col. Universidad
Tampico Office PTE. Tampico, Tam.
C.P. 89138 Mexico
Mexico Ameco Autopista Mexico Same (5)(25) 390-69- (5)(25) 390-
Services, S. DE QRQ No. 3065A 00 68-35
R. L. DE C.V. Fracc. Industrial Tlax
Colpan
54040 Tlalnepantla
Estado de Mexico,
Mexico
Mexico Ameco Av. Constituyentes Same (5)(25) 273-60- (5)(25) 273-
Services, S. DE #345 PB 90 63-13
R. L. DE C.V. 11830 Mexico, D.F.
Col. Daniel Garza,
Mexico
Mexico Ameco Nicasio Carbajal No. Same (52)(331) Same as
Services, S. DE 172 11216 telephone
R. L. DE C.V. Col. Azaleas
Villa De Alvarez,
Colima C.P. 28978,
Mexico
Morocco See France – Same
ODM

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A048 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1

Mozambique See South


Training only! Always Same
use your machine original documentation!
Africa P & H
Mine Pro
Services
Namibia See South Same
Africa P & H
Mine Pro
Services
Netherlands H.S.B. P.O. Box 584 7300 AN (31)(55) 542- (31)(55) 542-
Bouwmachines Netherlands Apeldoom 2543 or 542- 6580
Netherlands 2265 or
542-3535

New Zealand Cable Prince P.O. Box 38-040 3 Tunnel Grove (64)(4) 568- (64)(4) 568-
(NZ) Limited Wellington Mail Grace Field 4289 4283
Centre Wellington, Wellington, New
New Zealand Zealand
Peru P & H Mine Pro Calle Los Sauces Same (51)(1) 440- (51)(1) 440-
Services 374 6541 or (51)(1) 8042
Oficina 704 440-1196
San Isidro, Lima
00027 Peru
Russia Global 206 E. 38th St. Same (212) 490- (212) 490-
Technology New York, NY 2186 0354
Group, Ltd. 10016
Moscow Office: (7)(095) 230- (7)(095) 230-
2nd Spasso-Nalivkovsky Pereulok 1720 or 230- 1620
House #9, Ap 1 Moscow 117049, 1630
Russia

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A048 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1

Rwanda See Belgium


Training only! Always – machine original documentation!
use your
BIA
South Africa P & H Mine Pro P.O. Box 83676 442 Heidelburg (27)(11) 869- (27)(11) 869-
Services South Hills, South Rd. 1335 0566
Africa 2136 Tulisa Park
Johannesburg,
South Africa
South Africa P & H Mine Pro P.O. Box 259 Same (27)(11) 839- (27)(11) 839- Authorized
Services Maraisbur 1700 2713 2798 Rebuild
Maraisburg Republic of South Center
Branch Africa

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A048 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE & REBUILD CENTERS...CONT'D 1
Country Name Mailing Address Physical Telephone Fax Additional
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
Address Comments
INTERNATIONAL DEALERS:
Spain P & H Mine P.O. Box 12 Seaman Way (44)(1942) (44)(1942)
Pro Services Ince, Wigan Lanc WNI 3DD 61.44.00 61.04.19
U.K.
Same
Tanzania See South Same
Africa – P & H
Mine Pro
Services
Turkey Temsa Genes Sokak Temsa Binasi 8/4 (90)(312) 467-0848 (90)(312) 467-5009
Kavaklidere 06690 Ankara, Turkey
Same
Uganda Same
See South Africa – P &
H Mine Pro Services
Venezuela Mauricio Calle 67 #24-48 (58)(261) 783-5096 (58)(261) 783-4784
Martinez & P.O. Box 251 or
CIA., S.A. Maricaibo 4005 Estado Sulia, 783-5296
Venezuela
Same
Yugoslavia Jugotehna Kolarceva St. 7 Same (381)(11) 324-8355 (381)(11) 322-6642
11000 Beograd, or 322-1301
Yugoslavia
Zaire
See Belgium – BIA
Zambia
See South Africa – P &
H Mine Pro Services
Zimbabwe
See South Africa – P &
H Mine Pro Services

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 001A049 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SECTION 2
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
LETOURNEAU, INC.
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER
(READ BEFORE OPERATING OR SERVICING MACHINE)
OSL-2

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE OF THIS PUBLICATION
SAFETY STANDARDS
MACHINE SAFETY AND INSTRUCTIONAL SIGNS
SIGNAL WORDS
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL OPERATIONAL SAFETY GUIDELINES
BE PREPARED BEFORE STARTING
MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING THE MACHINE
START-UP SAFETY
SAFETY IN MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS
END THE OPERATING PERIOD SAFETY
SAFETY IN SERVICE AND REPAIR OPERATIONS
PRE-SERVICE OR REPAIR PREPARATIONS AND CAUTIONS
GENERAL SERVICE OR REPAIR PRECAUTIONS
OPERATOR’S CAB EMERGENCY EXIT
ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (ROPS) AND FALLING OBJECT
PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (FOPS)
SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCHES
OPERATION
REARVIEW MIRRORS
SIDE REARVIEW MIRRORS
ADJUSTMENTS FOR VIEWING
MAINTENANCE
SEAT BELTS
SEAT BELT OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT
FASTENING AND UNFASTENING THE BELT
ADJUSTMENTS
INSPECTION

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A001 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL


FIRE PREVENTION
MANUAL FIRE EXTINGUISHER
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM - AFEX™ OR ANSUL™ SYSTEMS (Optional)
FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM CIRCUIT MONITOR PANEL - ANSUL SYSTEM
(Optional)
CIRCUIT MONITOR PANEL – AFEX SYSTEM
MANUAL ACTUATION – AFEX AND ANSUL SYSTEMS
FIRE DETECTION ENGINE SHUTDOWN OPTION
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
ANSUL VEHICLE FIRE PROTECTION BOOKLET
ANSUL INSTALLATION, RECHARGE, INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
AFEX PRODUCT INFORMATION

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A001 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 1. IDENTIFICATION AND SAFETY GROUP
Figure 2. SHOCK HAZARDS
Figure 3. CRUSH HAZARD AREAS
Figure 4. MAINTENANCE LOCKOUT SWITCH (Optional) AND GROUND LEVEL
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCH (Optional)
Figure 5. FILTER PURGE TIMER SWITCH BOX
Figure 6. RADIATOR SURGE TANK AIR RELEASE BALL VALVE
Figure 7. CAB EMERGENCY EXIT (EARLY PRODUCTION MODEL) (CURRENT
PRODUCTION MODEL)
Figure 8. TYPICAL TORQUE NUT AS USED ON ROPS
Figure 9. ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (ROPS) AND FALLING OBJECT
PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (FOPS) ASSEMBLY
Figure 10. CAB WALL-MOUNTED EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH
Figure 11. GROUND LEVEL EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCH (Optional)
Figure 12. HYDRAULIC TANK AIR RELEASE VALVE
Figure 13. EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCHES – TYPICAL LOCATIONS
Figure 14. RECOMMENDED SIDE REARVIEW MIRROR ADJUSTMENT AND
APPROXIMATE FIELD OF VISION
Figure 14.1. TYPICAL "BLIND" AREAS ON LETOURNEAU EQUIPMENT
Figure 15. SIDE REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION
Figure 16. SEAT BELT COMPONENTS AND FASTENING/UNFASTENING
PROCEDURES
Figure 17. HAND-HELD PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Figure 18. FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM BOTTLES (AFEX SYSTEM SHOWN)
Figure 19. ANSUL FIRE DETECTION CIRCUIT MONITOR PANEL (Optional)
Figure 20. FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ACTUATOR SWITCHES AFEX AND
ANSUL SYSTEMS
Figure 21. AFEX CIRCUIT MONITOR PANEL
Figure 22. TYPICAL LOCATIONS OF FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ACTUATION
SWITCHES (TYPICAL LOCATIONS – STANDARD INSTALLATION)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A001 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SCOPE OF THIS PUBLICATION & SAFETY STANDARDS 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SCOPE OF THIS PUBLICATION


This publication contains general and specific safety precautions. The operator and
maintenance personnel should read these safety precautions carefully and understand them
before operating or performing maintenance operations to the equipment.

LeTourneau, Inc. cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might


involve a potential hazard. The warnings in this publication and on the
product are therefore not all inclusive. These rules will not apply to all
situations. If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique not
specifically recommended by LeTourneau, Inc. is used, the owner must be
satisfied that it is safe for all personnel. Also, ensure that the product will
not be damaged or made unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance
or repair procedures chosen. Operating the machine on different job sites
and under various environments can create safety hazards unique to that
particular situation. If a dangerous situation develops under these
circumstances, only the alertness of the operator and his proficiency in
operating the machine are available to cope with the emergency.

SAFETY STANDARDS
LeTourneau, Inc. endeavors to comply with the purposes and the applicable occupational
safety and health standards as set forth by the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA),
Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE), and International Standards Organization (ISO).
The customer should acknowledge that compliance with the above applicable organizations
under the law is the responsibility of each employer, and the employer should take all actions
necessary to maintain and operate LeTourneau, Inc. equipment or accessories according to
applicable standards. Carefully review the procedures given in this manual with all operators
ANNUALLY. It is essential that all operators be familiar with, AND FOLLOW, safety
precautions. Operating instructions must be given to everyone using the machine before
operation and at least once a year thereafter.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A002 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MACHINE SAFETY AND INSTRUCTIONAL SIGNS 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

MACHINE SAFETY AND INSTRUCTIONAL SIGNS


Safety and instructional signs are attached to the machine near specific hazard areas.
SIGNAL WORDS
The safety and instructional signs contain information for two levels of hazards and use the
signal words listed below:

Important safety information — a hazard that COULD cause serious injury


or loss of life.

Important information that tells how to prevent damage to equipment, or


how to avoid a situation that COULD cause minor injury.

MAINTENANCE
These guidelines should be followed in the maintenance of the safety and instructional signs
affixed to the machine:
a. These signs should be inspected daily and any that are damaged, deteriorated or
missing should be replaced as soon as possible. Make sure that all safety and
instruction signs can be read. Clean or replace these signs if the words or pictures
cannot be read or seen.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A003 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MACHINE SAFETY AND INSTRUCTIONAL SIGNS 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

The safety and instructional signs on the machine should be legible for
four to five years under normal conditions. The signs use 3M #300 acrylic
adhesive. To replace the safety signs, follow these instructions:

• Clean and dry the surface to be sure it is free of dust, oils, fingerprints or
oxidation. Use heptane or isopropyl alcohol to clean the surface.
• Temperature of the mounting surface should be 50°F or above.
• Apply the label firmly and evenly on the surface and rub it down vigorously
and apply mild heat of 100° to 130°F (38° to 54°C) to achieve good bonding.

b. When cleaning the signs, use a cloth, water and soap. Do not use solvent, gasoline or
high-pressure washer, etc.
c. Refer to illustrations "IDENTIFICATION AND SAFETY LABEL GROUP" for information
on the location and type of signs found on the machine.

If a safety or instructional sign is on a part that is replaced, make sure a


new sign is installed on the replaced part.

d. Refer to PARTS CATALOG for information on ordering replacement signs.

Replacement labels for the powered rear access ladder are only available
from the ladder manufacturer (available from the manufacturer's website).

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A003 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 1 SHEET 1 OF 7 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO TA-11424-6A FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION


ITEMS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 REFER TO SHEET 3 OF 7
ITEMS 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12 REFER TO SHEET 4 OF 7
ITEMS 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18 REFER TO SHEET 5 OF 7
ITEMS 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 REFER TO SHEET 6 OF 7
ITEMS 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 REFER TO SHEET 7 OF 7
Figure 1. IDENTIFICATION AND SAFETY GROUP
(SHEET 1 OF 7)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
2005 All Rights 50 SERIES DIGITAL
LeTourneau, Inc. 002A005 ( d 1 )
Reserved LOADER
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
TA11424-6A

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


10

10

3 4 5 6

27
2

7 29 11

28
9
1
8

12

13
14

15

18

16

21 12

20 17

19

18
16

TA11424-6A
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A005 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
TABBLANK

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service information documents. Make sure
you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER TABLOID BLANK PAGE ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 1 SHEET 2 OF 7 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO TA-11424-6B FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION


ITEMS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 REFER TO SHEET 3 OF 7
ITEMS 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12 REFER TO SHEET 4 OF 7
ITEMS 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18 REFER TO SHEET 5 OF 7
ITEMS 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 REFER TO SHEET 6 OF 7
ITEMS 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29 REFER TO SHEET 7 OF 7
Figure 1. IDENTIFICATION AND SAFETY GROUP (SHEET 2 OF 7)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
2005 All Rights 50 SERIES DIGITAL
LeTourneau, Inc. 002A007 ( d 1 )
Reserved LOADER
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation! TA11424-6B

28

26

25

24
22
10 16
21

20

19 18 16

29
22
23
27

12

17

18 16

12

13

4
15

TA11424-6B
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A007 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
TABBLANK

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service information documents. Make sure
you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER TABLOID BLANK PAGE ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 1 SHEET 3 OF 7 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 002A009 (p)

ITEMS 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Figure 1. IDENTIFICATION AND SAFETY GROUP (SHEET 3 OF 7)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A009 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
TA9981-6C

SPANISH--ENGLISH
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A009 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 1 SHEET 4 OF 7 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 002A009 (p)

ITEMS 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12


Figure 1. IDENTIFICATION AND SAFETY GROUP (SHEET 4 OF 7)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A010 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
TA9981-6D

10

11

12

SPANISH--ENGLISH
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A010 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 1 SHEET 5 OF 7 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 002A009 (p)

ITEMS 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18


Figure 1. IDENTIFICATION AND SAFETY GROUP (SHEET 5 OF 7)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A011 ( d 1 )
TA9981-6E

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

13

14

15

16

17

18

SPANISH--ENGLISH
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A011 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 1 SHEET 6 OF 7 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 002A009 (p)

ITEMS 19, 20, 21, 22, 23


Figure 1. IDENTIFICATION AND SAFETY GROUP (SHEET 6 OF 7)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A012 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA9981-6F

19

20

21

22

23

SPANISH--ENGLISH
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A012 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 1 SHEET 7 OF 7 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 002A009 (p)

ITEMS 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29


Figure 1. IDENTIFICATION AND SAFETY GROUP (SHEET 7 OF 7)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A013 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
TA9981-6G

24

25

26

27

28 29

SPANISH--ENGLISH
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A013 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL OPERATIONAL SAFETY GUIDELINES 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

GENERAL OPERATIONAL SAFETY GUIDELINES


BE PREPARED BEFORE STARTING
These guidelines should be followed before attempting to operate the machine.
a. KNOW THE EQUIPMENT: Read all publications of this manual thoroughly. BE SURE to
understand all control functions, capacities, clearances, limitations and routine
maintenance required for safe operation. Support personnel should also be familiar with
this information.
Learn the location and function of ALL controls, indicators, warning devices and caution
instructions. Improper operation or improper maintenance of this machine can result in
hazardous conditions.
b. This machine must be operated in accordance with the information and instructions
contained in DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.

LeTourneau, Inc. loaders are designed as off-highway equipment for use in


open pit applications that are in remote locations. Due to their very large
size they must work in an area with few other machines, and their only
proximity to buildings would be for routine maintenance or repair. They are
not to be operated near office buildings or residential areas.

c. Be familiar with the machine’s safety devices (if so equipped) such as:
1. Seat belts
2. Rollover protective structure (ROPS) and falling object protective structure (FOPS)
3. Articulated steering frame lock
4. Shields and guards
5. Visual and audible warning devices
6. Fire extinguisher or fire suppression system (optional)
7. Maintenance lockout switch (optional)
8. Battery disconnect switch
9. Emergency stop buttons
10. Rearview mirrors
11. Cab emergency exit
d. Know the work area; clear away trash and debris. Remove anything that could puncture
a tire.
e. Check overhead clearances. Know the size of doorways and canopies. Know how much
clearance there is under power and telephone lines.
f. Complete the daily walk-around inspection and services. Perform the inspections and
maintenance per the MODULE PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES. Check it
thoroughly for visual defects, such as leaks, frayed hoses, worn insulation and loose
parts.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A015 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL OPERATIONAL SAFETY GUIDELINES 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING THE MACHINE


These guidelines should be followed when mounting and dismounting the machine:

There are no provisions on any LeTourneau, Inc. built loader to


accommodate the transportation of any persons other than the operator
alone. Ladders and catwalks attached to the machine are designed for
servicing of the machine while the machine is stopped only. They are NOT
designed for transporting riders at any time. Serious injury or death could
result while riding on any location of the machine other than the Operator’s
Cab.

a. Always use “three point support” with the machine, and face the machine while you enter
or leave it. “Three point support” means that three out of four arms and legs are in
contact with the machine at all times during mount and dismount.

b. Clean shoes and wipe hands before attempting to climb on the machine.
c. Use handholds, ladders or steps (as provided) when mounting and dismounting.
d. NEVER attempt to mount or dismount a moving machine.
e. NEVER jump off the machine.
f. NEVER try to climb on or off the machine when carrying tools or supplies. Use a hand
line to pull equipment up onto the platform.
g. Observe proper shutdown procedures before dismounting.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A015 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL OPERATIONAL SAFETY 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
GUIDELINES...CONT'D...START UP SAFELY

START UP SAFELY
These guidelines should be followed in the normal operation of the machine:
a. Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry that can catch on controls or other parts of the
machine.
b. Make certain all protective guards and covers are secured in place on the machine.
c. Keep the machine, especially walkways, platforms and steps free of foreign material,
such as debris, oil, tools and other items that are not part of the machine.
d. Secure all loose items such as lunch boxes, tools and other items that are not part of
the machine.

e. Start up safely. Blow the horn before starting up.


1. Allow at least 30 seconds for anyone working on or around the machine to exit the
area. The operator should also inspect the machine before the shift and after work
breaks to be sure no one is around it before starting.
2. Visually determine the area is clear before moving the machine.

Do not allow anyone to stand on any area of the machine, particularly near
steps in the area between the tires when the engine is running. There is no
clearance for persons in this area when the machine is turned.
Attach the frame lock before performing service work or lifting the machine
or transporting on another vehicle. Before operating, be sure frame lock is
removed and secured.

f. Follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended starting procedure. After engine


has been started, check all gauges and instruments to be sure that everything is
operating properly.
g. Diesel exhaust fumes can cause sickness. If necessary to start an engine in an
enclosed area, be sure adequate ventilation is provided.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A016 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL OPERATIONAL SAFETY 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
GUIDELINES...CONT'D...START UP SAFELY

h. Operate bucket and hoist controls through a complete cycle — check for faulty
operation. Report any sluggishness, binding, or over travel to your foreman.
i. To be sure direction of travel and speed can be controlled, move the Direction
Control Switch to forward and reverse positions, and press the accelerator pedal slowly.
j. Test brakes before operating. Test PARKING and DYNAMIC BRAKES to make sure
the machine will be able to stop and stay stopped.
k. Recheck lights, backup alarm or other warning and safety devices.
l. Sit properly, in an alert position. Check out controls in a safe area while moving
slowly. STEER MACHINE BOTH RIGHT AND LEFT to be sure steering is operating
properly.
m. Never carry an unauthorized rider. The operator’s cab is designed for one person
only.

NEVER use the bucket or lift arms to lift


personnel. Serious injury or loss of life is
possible.

n. Know where the emergency first aid kit is located and how to use it. Inspect it
frequently to be sure all items are present and in good condition.
o. Watch out for overhead dangers. Keep a safe distance from overhead power lines.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A016 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL OPERATIONAL SAFETY GUILDELINES CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your
SAFETY INmachine
MAT'Loriginal documentation!
HANDLING OPER.

SAFETY IN MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS


Remember these rules when working with the machine in mining operations:
a. Go slowly in congested areas, over rough ground and on slopes. Keep the
machine’s speed slow enough to be in COMPLETE CONTROL AT ALL TIMES.
b. Give loaded vehicles the right of way. Follow employer’s traffic rules for the job site.
Watch out for other vehicles.
c. Position the bucket three or four feet above the ground and rolled back so it does not
block vision when traveling.
d. The bucket should not be used as a brake except in an emergency if all other means
fail.
e. Load, carry and unload safely. When loading, try to park the machine on level
ground. Start and stop smoothly when carrying a load.
f. Stay back from edge of banks and pits. Edges can cave off or the machine can lose
its footing and slide over the edge.
g. Know the employer’s hand signals. It is important to know the exact meaning of all
hand signals applicable to and used during operation. Failure to correctly respond to a
hand signal could result in severe injury or death. Accept operational signals from one
person only, but accept an emergency shutdown signal from anyone who gives it.
h. Be alert. Be aware of what is going on around the machine. Maintain a safe operating
distance between the machine and other equipment and personnel.
i. When dumping into hauling vehicles, BE CAREFUL NOT TO HIT THE VEHICLE
with the loader lift arm or bucket.
j. Use care on slopes. Operate straight up and down slopes whenever possible. Use
extreme caution during any side hill operations. NEVER DESCEND A GRADE FASTER
THAN THE MACHINE COULD CLIMB THAT SAME GRADE. Refer to TYPICAL
TRAVEL SPEEDS CAUTION SIGN.
k. Keep the bucket close to the ground for stability. If an overload causes the machine
to tip forward, DO NOT PANIC - - LOWER THE LOAD TO THE GROUND, and the
machine will stabilize.
l. Be careful in a hazardous area. Whenever possible, two people should work together
in hazardous areas - one to operate the machine and the other to direct and watch for
dangers.
1. NEVER enter a dust cloud or a dark area such as an underpass or building before
checking it for obstructions or hazards that cannot be seen.
2. Watch for overhead dangers, such as overhanging trees or falling rocks. Do not
undercut banks. Keep a safe distance from overhead power lines -- and check
for buried power and utility lines before digging.
m. Report a malfunctioning machine. EVEN A MINOR PROBLEM CAN BECOME
SERIOUS. Report any mechanical problems to your supervisor.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A017 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL OPERATIONAL SAFETY GUILDELINES CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your
SAFETY INmachine
MAT'Loriginal documentation!
HANDLING OPER.

The right side window of the operator’s cab serves as an emergency exit.
Refer to OPERATOR'S CAB EMERGENCY EXIT for additional information.

n. If the machine must be left unattended:


1. First, set the PARK BRAKE switch.
2. Lower bucket to ground.
3. Move ENGINE SELECT switch to the LO position. Let idle for four to five minutes.
4. Turn key switch to OFF position.
5. Place a DO NOT OPERATE sign on the controls if the machine must be left
unattended and safety or maintenance deficiencies exist.

END THE OPERATING PERIOD SAFELY


a. Park in an unobstructed, flat area.
b. SHUTDOWN PROPERLY. First, set the PARK BRAKE switch.
c. Move the ENGINE SELECT switch to the LO position and let the engine idle for four or
five minutes.
d. Place all controls in the OFF position and turn key switch OFF position.
e. To prevent unauthorized starting, remove the ignition key.
f. To prevent tampering, lock the cab door.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A017 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY IN SERVICE AND REPAIR OPERATIONS & FIGURE 2 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SAFETY IN SERVICE AND REPAIR OPERATIONS


PRE-SERVICE OR REPAIR PREPARATIONS AND CAUTIONS
The loader’s enormous size and diesel-electric power unit make it necessary to take special
precautions to ensure a safe working environment.
The following precautions and procedures should be adhered to anytime the loader is brought
in for service or repair:

In addition to the following instructions, anyone performing service


operations to the loader should be familiar with the location and operation
of all service switches and connections as described in SERVICE
SWITCHES AND CONNECTIONS.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A019 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY IN SERVICE AND REPAIR OPERATIONS & FIGURE 2 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NEVER open electrical control cabinet while engine is


running. High voltage is present when machine is at HI
Throttle.

If inspection or service procedures


involve contact with any
component of the electrical
system, opening the electrical
control cabinet or removing axle
access covers, the electrical
system MUST be locked out and
grounded. Accidental contact with
energized terminals could result in
serious injury or loss of life.

NEVER remove axle access panels unless electrical


system is locked out and grounded. Warning labels not
shown in above photo. Similar access panels found on
rear axle.

Figure 2. SHOCK HAZARDS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A019 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 3 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

The frame lock should be


moved to the locked
position ANYTIME service
or repair operations are
being conducted. This is
especially important when
LOADER STEERED STRAIGHT energized tests of
(Arrows indicate crush hazard areas) components are
performed, when work is
being done in the pivot
area of the machine, or if
the machine is jacked up.
There is no room for a
person in the pivot area or
the area between the tires
when the machine turns.
Service personnel should
enter this area only when
absolutely necessary.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A020 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 3 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

The LINCS™ Computer


System provides a means
of aligning the front and
rear frame for installing
the frame lock without a
person entering the pivot
area during the alignment
process. To use this
method, access the Main
Menu on the LINCS™
Computer System by
pressing the number “1”
on the computer keypad.
Choose option #3,
“Channel Browser”. Next,
press “1” and use the
left/right arrow keys to
choose “Hydraulics.”
LOADER ARTICULATED TO LEFT
Then, enter the number
(Arrows indicate crush hazard areas)
“2”, which will enable data
for the machine’s various
hydraulic functions. Use
CRUSH HAZARDS EXIST BOTH SIDES OF the left/right arrow keys to
MACHINE select “Steering.” View the
steering angle data. Steer
the loader left or right until
the angle is “0”. The front
and rear frames are
perfectly aligned and the
frame lock can now be
moved to the locked
position.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A020 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 3 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Following completion of
service or repair
operations, it is critically
important that the frame
lock be removed from the
locked position and
properly stowed or
machine damage will
result.

(LEFT SIDE OF MACHINE AT PIVOT AREA)

Figure 3. CRUSH HAZARD AREAS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A020 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY IN SERVICE AND REPAIR OPERATIONS...CONT'D & 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original4documentation!
FIGURE

The MAINTENANCE
LOCKOUT SWITCH
(optional) should be
used to disable the
loader’s start function
ANYTIME the loader is
under service or repair.
The MAINTENANCE
LOCKOUT SWITCH is
mounted on the left
ladder box on the left
side of the machine.
If the loader is not
equipped with the
MAINTENANCE
LOCKOUT SWITCH, the
key should be removed
from the KEY SWITCH
on the operator’s
controls and a DO NOT
OPERATE sign attached
to the controls before
any inspections or
service procedures are
begun.
(MOUNTED ON LEFT LADDER BOX)
Figure 4. MAINTENANCE LOCKOUT SWITCH (OPTIONAL) AND GROUND LEVEL
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCH (OPTIONAL)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A021 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY IN SERVICE AND REPAIR OPERATIONS...CONT'D & 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original4documentation!
FIGURE

a. Use of the SHOP MODE SWITCH. The machine is equipped with a SHOP MODE
SWITCH (refer to illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE" for the location of the SHOP
MODE SWITCH on the operator’s console) that allows the operator to maneuver the
loader around the service area with the engine speed at 1500 RPM. To activate this
mode, the machine must be stopped and the ENGINE SELECT SWITCH in the HI
position. When the SHOP MODE SWITCH is in the ON position, the shop mode is
engaged and the machine will travel at 5 MPH (maximum). Moving the switch to the
OFF position disengages the shop mode and the engine will return to HI throttle.
b. The operator should use assistance when moving the machine around the service area
and into and out of buildings.
c. BE SURE ramps, floors and aisles are adequate to support and clear the machine when
moving in and out of a building. Refer to DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER
SPECIFICATIONS for dimensions and weight of the loader.
d. If possible, conduct all service and repair operations with the machine parked on a level,
hard surface.

If the machine becomes disabled in the field, it is recommended that only


sufficient repairs be made at the loader failure location to allow the
machine to be moved. Then, move the machine to a safe work area for
completion of repairs. Test the machine before returning it to work, as
required by the nature of the repairs.

e. Block the machine to prevent it from rolling while working on or under it.
f. Lower the bucket to the ground and use the AUX PILOT PUMP SWITCH to vent hoist
and bucket circuit pressure before beginning inspection, service or repair operations.
Refer to AUXILIARY PILOT PUMP SWITCH for information to vent hoist and bucket
circuit pressure in the hoist and bucket circuit. The remainder of the hydraulic system
retains pressure. Use extreme caution when opening fittings, connecting quick
couplings etc.
g. Set the parking brake.
h. Turn the FILTER PURGE TIMER SWITCH to the OFF position (refer to illustration
"FILTER PURGE TIMER SWITCH BOX"). The FILTER PURGE TIMER SWITCH is
located on the left side of the machine at the pivot area. Refer to SERVICE SWITCHES
AND CONNECTIONS for additional information on the FILTER PURGE TIMER
SWITCH.
i. Consider the size and weight of the machine and its components when jacking it up or
removing components and assemblies. BE SURE to have adequate hoisting devices,
tools and support facilities to accommodate the weight of the machine or its
components.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A021 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY IN SERVICE AND REPAIR OPERATIONS...CONT'D... & 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine
FIGURES original
5& documentation!
6

(LEFT SIDE OF MACHINE AT LEFT PIVOT AREA)


Figure 5. FILTER PURGE TIMER SWITCH BOX

Loader and component weights are provided in GENERAL INFORMATION


(L-1350, L-1850 and L-2350), and loader jacking instructions are provided in
LOADER JACKING INSTRUCTIONS.

GENERAL SERVICE OR REPAIR PRECAUTIONS


a. Wear a hard hat, protective glasses and other protective equipment as required by job
conditions.

b. NEVER use an open flame to check the battery, fuel, coolant or to look for leaks
anywhere on the machine. Use lights as provided or a flashlight.
c. DO NOT make unauthorized modifications to the machine. These modifications may
impair the function and safety and affect machine life.
d. NEVER put maintenance fluids such as oils, solvents, diesel, etc., into glass containers
e. NEVER use gasoline for cleaning purposes.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A022 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY IN SERVICE AND REPAIR OPERATIONS...CONT'D... & 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine
FIGURES original
5& documentation!
6

f. Pressurized air can cause personal injury. When using pressurized air for
cleaning, wear a face shield and protective clothing.

g. Use stands to reach service or repair points.


h. BE CAREFUL with a hot cooling system. Liquid cooling systems build up pressure, as
the engine gets hot. Before removing the radiator cap, stop the engine and let the
system cool. Remove the radiator cap only after the coolant is cold and pressure has
been released with the pressure release valve. Refer to illustration "RADIATOR
SURGE TANK AIR RELEASE BALL".

(LOCATED ON TOP OF TOW UNIT)


Figure 6. RADIATOR SURGE TANK AIR RELEASE BALL VALVE
i. Keep clear of all rotating components. Wrapping, entanglement or contact by clothing
or extremities may result in serious injury or death.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A022 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY IN SERVICE AND REPAIR OPERATIONS...CONT'D. 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NEVER work on the engine while it is running unless specifically instructed


by the engine manufacturer. Serious injury or loss of life from
entanglement in rotating components is possible.

j. Hot oil and components can cause personal injury. Do not allow hot oil or components to
contact the skin.

k. Avoid prolonged and repeated skin contact with used oil. With prolonged and repeated
contact, serious skin or bodily injury may develop. Wash thoroughly after contact.
l. BE CAREFUL with fluids under pressure. The hydraulic system is under pressure
whenever the engine is running and will hold pressure after shutdown.

Diesel fuel, hydraulic fluid or grease under pressure can penetrate the skin
and cause serious personal injury, blindness or death. If any fluid is
injected into the skin, it must be removed within a few hours by a doctor
familiar with treating this type of injury.
Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible. When searching for leaks,
NEVER use your hand; use a piece of metal. Wear work gloves and keep
your hand well away from the possible source of leakage. DO NOT tighten
or loosen fuel, hydraulic, or grease lines without first relieving the
pressure. Wear safety goggles for eye protection.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A023 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SAFETY IN SERVICE AND REPAIR OPERATIONS...CONT'D. 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

WRONG
RIGHT

Battery post, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

m. Refer to safety instructions in TIRE AND RIM MOUNTING AND DEMOUNTING before
inflating, deflating or removing or installing wheels and tires.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A023 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OPERATOR'S CAB EMERGENCY EXIT & FIGURE 7 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

OPERATOR’S CAB EMERGENCY EXIT


The window on the right side of the Operator’s Cab serves as an emergency exit.
For emergency exit:

z Early production models - flip latches on right side of window and push window out. Refer
to "CAB EMERGENCY EXIT-EARLY PRODUCTION MODELS".
z Current production models - pull ripcord tab to remove cord completely from window
frame and push window out. Refer to illustration "CAB EMERGENCY EXIT-CURRENT
PRODUCTION MODELS".

Use the window for exiting the cab only in the event of an emergency.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A025 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OPERATOR'S CAB EMERGENCY EXIT & FIGURE 7 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Right side cab window


– Flip latches up to release window – Right side cab window shown in open
push window out to exit. position for emergency exit.
EARLY PRODUCTION MODELS

EARLY PRODUCTION MODELS CURRENT PRODUCTION MODELS


Figure 7. CAB EMERGENCY EXIT - (EARLY AND CURRENT PRODUCTION MODELS)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A025 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
ROPS AND FOPS & FIGURE 8 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (ROPS) AND


FALLING OBJECT PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (FOPS)
The loader is equipped with a Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS) and a Falling Object
Protective Structure (FOPS). The ROPS provides the operator crush protection in a rollover
and the FOPS provides protection from objects falling onto the cab from above. The FOPS is
bolted to the top of the ROPS (illustration "ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE AND
FALLING OBJECT PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY").

The ROPS structure is certified per government regulations. Any modifications


to the ROPS, such as welding on or drilling holes in the structural members will
affect the capability of the ROPS to provide adequate protection. Any
modification or repair to the ROPS without the specific approval of LeTourneau,
Inc. will void its certification. Contact your authorized LeTourneau, Inc.
distributor before making any modifications or repairs to ensure that such will
not void the certification.

SERVICE REQUIREMENTS
Check the torque on the ROPS torque nut capscrews after the initial 250 hours of operation
and every 500 hours thereafter. The proper torque is 114 ft. lbs. (154.6 N•m) lubed, per bolt.
Refer to illustrations "TYPICAL TORQUE NUT AS USED ON ROPS" and "ROLL OVER
PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE AND FALLING OBJECT PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
ASSEMBLY".

The service intervals for the ROPS torque nut capscrews are listed on the
SERVICE UPON RECEIPT CHECKLIST and the MODULAR PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES - POST BREAK-IN PERIOD.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A027 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
ROPS AND FOPS & FIGURE 8 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Figure 8. TYPICAL TORQUE NUT AS USED ON ROPS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A027 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 9 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 002A028 (p)


1. FALLING OBJECT PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (FOPS)
2. BOLT
3. LOCKWASHER
4. FLATWASHER
5. ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (ROPS)
6. BOLT
7. PIN
8. CAPTIVE PLATE
9. WASHER
10. TORQUE NUT
11. CAPSCREW
12. LOCKWASHER
13. BOLT
14. COVER STRUCTURE
15. REAR FRAME STRUCTURE
Figure 9. ROLL OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE AND FALLING OBJECT
PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE ASSEMBLY

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A028 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
1 TA9997-8

9 12
8 13

11
10

14

15

TA9997-8
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A028 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCHES & FIGURES 10, 11 & 12 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCHES


A twist-to-release, palm operated, pushbutton type emergency shutdown switch is provided on
the left inside cab wall in standard applications (illustration "CAB WALL MOUNTED
EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH").
Four ground-level emergency shutdown switches are optionally provided on the loader. These
switches are twist-to-release, palm-operated, spring-loaded, pushbutton type switches. Two
are mounted on each side of the machine. Refer to illustrations "GROUND LEVEL
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCH" for a photograph of the switch and "EMERGENCY
SHUTDOWN SWITCHES" for the typical mounting locations on the loader. Mounting locations
for the switches may vary depending on other options ordered.

Figure 10. CAB WALL MOUNTED EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH

Figure 11. GROUND LEVEL EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCH (OPTIONAL)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A029 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCHES & FIGURES 10, 11 & 12 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
OPERATION
When pressed, these switches de-activate the engine governor, which in turn kills the engine.
All AC voltages and most DC control voltages are de-activated when the emergency stop
circuit is actuated. The park brake is immediately set.
Power is restored when the emergency stop switch is reset, although the engine will continue
to die due to the governor configuration. Once the engine has stopped, the start sequence
may be reinitiated.
When the emergency stop or fire suppression systems are actuated, the automatic air release
valve, located on top of the hydraulic tank, will automatically release air pressure from the
hydraulic tank. Once tripped, the valve must be manually reset by pushing the button IN to the
closed position (illustration "HYDRAULIC TANK AIR RELEASE VALVE").

Figure 12. HYDRAULIC TANK AIR RELEASE VALVE

Bring machine to a complete stop before pressing EMERGENCY


SHUTDOWN SWITCHES. The parking brake will be immediately applied.
Stopping action will be immediate and positive.

Use EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCHES only in an emergency. Damage


to turbochargers and traction motors could result.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A029 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCHES & FIGURES 10, 11 & 12 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Anytime the emergency shutdown function has been activated, the engine
and traction motors must be inspected by a qualified and experienced
technician before placing the loader back in service. Damage to
turbocharger bearings and arcing inside the traction motors is possible.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A029 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 13 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO TA-9302 FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION

NUMBER OF SWITCHES AND LOCATIONS MAY VARY WITH


CUSTOMER SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTALLED OPTIONS. CHECK
YOUR MACHINE AND NOTE ANY ADDITIONAL LOCATIONS
1. RIGHT REAR OF MACHINE NEAR BATTERY BOX
2. RIGHT SIDE OF MACHINE ON HYDRAULIC TANK
3. LEFT CAB WALL
4. LEFT SIDE OF MACHINE ON LADDER BOX
5. LEFT SIDE OF MACHINE NEAR BATTERY BOX
Figure 13. EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCHES - TYPICAL LOCATIONS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A030 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA9302

2
1

4
5

TA9302
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A030 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
REARVIEW MIRRORS 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REARVIEW MIRRORS
SIDE REARVIEW MIRRORS
Side rearview mirrors are mounted on each side of the operator’s cab to provide a rectangular
view of each side of the machine. The operator can use the rearview mirrors to check blind
areas when BACKING UP or MOVING SLOWLY to see if people, equipment or other
obstacles are in a dangerous position for operation of the machine.

The side rearview mirrors do not eliminate all potential blind spots behind
and to the side of the machine. The operator must be continually aware of
other personnel, vehicles and objects within the work area. Advise support
personnel to ALWAYS maintain a safe distance and visual contact with the
operator when in the area of machine operation. If unsure of location of
personnel or vehicles in the work area, exit the cab and look!

ADJUSTMENTS FOR VIEWING


The view scene includes the top edge of the tow unit and rear tire ground contact area. The
angles of view are approximately 70º vertical and 48º horizontal (refer to illustration
"RECOMMENDED SIDE REARVIEW MIRROR ADJUSTMENT AND APPROXIMATE FIELD
OF VISION").
The mirrors are convex with a spherical radius of 30” and are rectangular 20” long by 12”
wide. The support and mounting system provides protection from most contact with solid
objects. The mirrors also have a protective top cover that will readily swing aside if pushed by
another object.
The mirror’s sub assemblies, consisting of hold down plates, clamps, friction rings and
fasteners are designed to perform two functions (refer to illustration "SIDE REARVIEW
MIRROR INSTALLATION"):
• The first function is to allow easily and accurately adjusted angle positioning of the
tubular support with the fasteners tightened sufficiently to hold the arm in trial
positions.
• The second function is to prevent damage to the mirrors by destructive forces such as
caused by the mirror’s encounter with an obstruction. This requires additional
tightening of the fasteners as described below. The U-bolt fasteners that attach the
mirrors to the support arm are not intended to slip during use and are loosened only for
trial tilt and reach adjustments of the mirror and support arm.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A031 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
REARVIEW MIRRORS 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Pan, Tilt and Reach Adjustments


To make mirror adjustments the operator should be seated in his normal position and
operating posture. An additional person should be positioned on the platform outside the cab
to adjust the mirrors as directed by the operator. Refer to illustration "SIDE REARVIEW
MIRROR INSTALLATION" for component locations described in the following instructions.
a. Loosen the post clamps and U-bolts enough for easy movement but tight enough to
prevent undesired position change during adjustment.
b. Move the mirror up and down (rotate around support arm) for vertical tilt angle
adjustment.
c. Slide the mirror housing inboard and outboard on the support arm for reach adjustment.
d. Swing the support post for horizontal pan angle adjustment.

The best possible mirror adjustment will produce a view scene including
the top rear of the tow unit and the bottom of the rear tire, and without
losing too much of the side of the tow unit and tire, as large an area as
possible to each side of the machine. This must be accomplished with the
reach adjustment locating the mirror as near to the machine as possible.

e. After the mirror is moved to the desired position, fully tighten the pipe clamps.
f. Tighten the four fasteners on the top friction assembly so that when pressing at the
outboard end of the support arm pipe, maximum possible thumb-only pressure will
swing the arm. Loosen these four fasteners exactly two turns.
g. Repeat Step ”f” with the bottom friction assembly, except in this case, after thumb
pressure test, leave as adjusted and retighten the top friction assembly exactly two turns
of each fastener.
h. Check final adjustment with two thumbs.
i. If support arm extends more than two inches outboard from the mirror, cut off the
excess.
MAINTENANCE
a. Replace damaged parts when necessary. Refer to the PARTS CATALOG for ordering
replacement parts.
b. Keep mirror glass clean by using window washing solution and wiping with paper towel.
c. If paint touch up is required, use RUSTOLEUM #659.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A031 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 14 & 14.1 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 002A032 (p)


Figure 14. RECOMMENDED SIDE REARVIEW MIRROR ADJUSTMENT AND
APPROXIMATE FIELD OF VISION

Illustration NOT to scale


Figure 14.1. TYPICAL "BLIND" AREAS ON LETOURNEAU EQUIPMENT

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A032 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
TA9536-8

PLAN VIEW OF LOADER

APPROXIMATE 24°
(EACH MIRROR) APPROXIMATE SIDEWAYS
LIMIT OF VISION

APPROXIMATE UPPER
LIMIT OF VISION
MIRROR

APPROXIMATE 70°
(EACH MIRROR)

RIGHT SIDE VIEW

APPROXIMATE LOWER
LIMIT OF VISION
TA9536-8
TA9536-8
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A032 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 15 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO TA-9550 FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION


Figure 15. SIDE REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A033 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA9550

TA-9550
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A033 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SEAT BELTS & FIGURE 16 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SEAT BELTS
The machine is equipped with adjustable seat belts to accommodate operators of various
statures. The seat belts are mounted to the operator’s seat.

The operator’s seat must be properly adjusted for safe operation of all
controls and seat belt fastened before starting the engine to operate the
machine. Instructions for adjusting the air suspension operator’s seat are
located in AUTOMATIC AND MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENTS on page
003A021 (d).

Always check the condition of the seat belts and mounting hardware before
operating the machine.

SEAT BELT OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT


Operation and adjustment of the seat belts is shown in illustration "SEAT BELT
COMPONENTS AND FASTENING/UNFASTENING PROCEDURES".
FASTENING AND UNFASTENING THE BELT
To fasten the belt:
Insert the tongue into the buckle. Listen for the “click” that indicates the belts are fastened.
Tug on the belts to be sure they are securely fastened (illustration "SEAT BELT
COMPONENTS AND FASTENING/UNFASTENING PROCEDURES").
To unfasten the belt:
Press the red button in the top of the buckle and pull the tongue from the buckle (illustration
"SEAT BELT COMPONENTS AND FASTENING/UNFASTENING PROCEDURES").
ADJUSTMENTS
The belt should be snug but comfortable. The left side belt only adjusts.
To lengthen the belt:
a. With the belt unfastened, move the lock bar slide toward the buckle (illustration "SEAT
BELT COMPONENTS AND FASTENING/UNFASTENING PROCEDURES").
b. Pull on the buckle until the slack is removed from the outer belt loop.
c. Readjust the belt if it does not fit snugly.
To shorten the belt:
a. With the belt fastened, pull on the outer loop to tighten the belt.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A035 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SEAT BELTS & FIGURE 16 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

INSPECTION
a. Inspect for worn or frayed webbing.
b. Check for worn or damaged buckle or lock bar. Replace the entire assembly if worn or
damaged.
c. Inspect the belt mounting hardware. Replace any damaged or worn hardware. Keep
the mounting bolts tight.

1. MOUNT BRACKET
2. BELT
3. LOCKBAR
4. TONGUE
5. BUCKLE
Figure 16. SEAT BELT COMPONENTS AND FASTENING/UNFASTENING
PROCEDURES

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A035 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL & FIGURES 17 & 18 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL


In the event of a fire, the machine is optionally equipped with either a manually operated fire
extinguisher or a fire suppression system.

FIRE PREVENTION
Proper machine inspection and maintenance is CRITICALLY IMPORTANT to prevent a
disastrous fire. The following guidelines should be followed to reduce the chances of a fire:
a. Daily inspection and preventive maintenance at points where fires are most likely to start
- engine block, electrical system, turbochargers, exhaust manifolds, brake system and
hydraulic gearbox/pump area is critically important.
b. Regular cleaning of all areas where flammable materials such as fuel, oil, grease,
hydraulic fluid and combustible debris may collect is also critically important.

Refer to CLEANING AND COMPONENT INSPECTION for tips on cleaning


your machine.

c. NEVER smoke while checking fuel level or refueling. Unguarded trouble lights, flames,
or spark producing devices should be kept at a safe distance while refueling. ALWAYS
stop the engine before refueling the machine.
d. Keep all fuel and lubricants stored in properly marked containers and away from
unauthorized persons.
e. Store oily rags or other flammable material in a protective container, in a safe place.
f. Make sure all clamps, guards and heat shields are installed correctly to prevent
vibration, rubbing against other parts and excessive heat during operation.
g. DO NOT weld or cut on pipes, tubes or tanks that contain flammable liquids or gases.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A037 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL & FIGURES 17 & 18 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
MANUAL FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Inspect the machine’s manual hand-held fire extinguisher regularly and read and understand
its operation. This fire extinguisher is capable of putting out fires in the following materials:
wood, paper, cloth, electrical, gasoline and oil.

(MOUNTED ON TOP OF
ELECTRICAL CONTROL CABINET
BEHIND OPERATOR’S CAB)
Figure 17. HAND-HELD PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER

(BOTTLES MOUNTED BOTH SIDES (BOTTLES MOUNTED INSIDE


OF TOW UNIT) FRONT FRAME)
Figure 18. FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM BOTTLES - AFEX SYSTEM SHOWN

a. If the extinguisher is equipped with a gauge, ensure the needle is in the green portion of
the gauge.
b. Ensure the pin is installed and the seal has not been broken.
c. Have the fire extinguisher inspected and serviced by licensed personnel at the required
interval or immediately if it has been discharged.
d. Read and understand your employer’s policy in regards to extinguishing fires before
attempting to manually extinguish any fire.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A037 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL CONT'D & FIGURE 19 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM - AFEX™ or ANSUL™ SYSTEMS (Optional)


The loader is equipped with a manual discharge fire suppression system. Operator safety is
greatly enhanced; however, the operator’s cab is not protected. It is the responsibility of the
equipment owner to ensure operators and service technicians read and understand the
manufacturer’s owner’s manual.

The fire system provided on the machine is a suppression system only and
is not designed or intended to extinguish all fires, particularly when
unusual amounts of combustible materials and an ample oxygen supply
are present. It is extremely important that alternative fire fighting
equipment be available in case the system does not totally extinguish a
fire.
Use extreme care to prevent the accumulation of debris, combustible
materials and fluids that could intensify the fire or cause it to spread to
areas where there was no previous potential for fire.
If modifications are made to the machine, or if the fire suppression system
is disconnected for any reason, make sure the fire equipment is
immediately inspected and tested by an authorized distributor for the
system’s manufacturer.

The fire suppression system’s dry chemical dispersion nozzles are


strategically located inside the front and rear frames. The operator’s cab is
NOT protected. The fire suppression system will NOT suppress fires
outside the machine or in the operator’s cab. The hand-held portable fire
extinguisher is recommended and is useful if re-ignition occurs or when
fires originate independently of the machine or outside the protected areas.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A038 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL CONT'D & FIGURE 19 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

The discharge of the dry chemical fire suppression agent may create
personnel hazards such as obscured vision or temporary breathing
difficulties.

Bring machine to a complete stop and shut down engine before deploying.
System actuation will result in immediate discharge, which may obscure
vision.

The fire suppression system is a MANUALLY DISCHARGED system. Fire


detection is optionally provided, but the fire suppression system WILL NOT
automatically discharge.

FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM CIRCUIT MONITOR PANEL - ANSUL SYSTEM (Optional)


The fire detection system circuit monitor panel (optional) is mounted on the rear inside cab wall
(illustration "ANSUL FIRE DETECTION CIRCUIT MONITOR PANEL"). The circuit monitor’s
function is to monitor the fire suppression system’s electrical detection and manual actuation
circuits and provide the operator with both visual and audible warnings of a fire.
Visual indicators: The circuit monitor panel provides LED indicators for battery, alarm,
detection, release and power to the panel. In the event of fire detection, an audible alarm
accompanies the LED Alarm indicator.
Controls: The front panel contains a “DELAY” and “RESET” button. The DELAY button is
non-functional.
The RESET button is used to reinitialize the control panel when depressed; it provides an
indication that all LEDs and the audible alarm are functional.
Sequence of Operation: Upon receiving an input signal indicating a fire, the Alarm LED will
flash and the audible alarm will pulse at the rate of two times per second. Refer to MANUAL
ACTUATION.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A038 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL CONT'D & FIGURE 19 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Figure 19. ANSUL FIRE DETECTION CIRCUIT MONITOR PANEL


(OPTIONAL)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A038 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

CIRCUIT MONITOR PANEL - AFEX SYSTEM


A circuit monitor panel is mounted on the rear inside cab wall. Refer to illustrations "FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ACTUATOR SWITCHES" and "AFEX CIRCUIT MONITOR
PANEL". The circuit monitor’s function is to monitor the fire suppression system’s electrical
detection and actuation circuits, including the power source, squib (explosive charge which
actuates the discharge of the fire suppression agent), and continuity of the detection wiring.

The AFEX fire suppression system retains its manual discharge


capabilities should the circuit monitor panel or any of its internal circuitry
fail. If the circuit monitor panel must be removed for any reason, the fire
suppression system can be wired to retain its manual actuation feature.
Refer to the manufacturer’s owner’s manual through their respective
website.

The circuit monitor panel provides audible and visual indicators of alarm conditions. The
operator can monitor detection and release circuits and power supply. A system reset button
and restart time delay is also provided.
Visual indicators:
• Green LED - Power to circuit monitor panel
• Red LED - Alarm
• Amber LED - Alarm silence activated - Trouble with squib - Trouble with detection circuit
Controls:
• Alarm Silence
• Push to test
• System reset
• Push-on, Push-off operation (flush mounted behind panel cover)
MANUAL ACTUATION - AFEX AND ANSUL SYSTEMS
The loader is equipped with three manual firing mechanisms. One mechanism is located in
the operator’s cab (refer to illustration "FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ACTUATOR
SWITCHES"). The other two mechanisms are located at ground level, one mounted on the
electrical control cabinet on the left side of the loader and the other mounted on the hydraulic
tank on the right side of the loader (refer to illustration "LOCATIONS OF FIRE SUPPRESSION
SYSTEM ACTUATION SWITCHES"). If the operator notices or is alerted to a fire, the
following actions should be taken:
1. Quickly bring the machine to a complete stop and shut down the engine.
2. Manually actuate the fire suppression system by pulling the safety pin from the neck
of the cab or remote firing mechanism and strike down HARD on the push knob/lever
(as applicable).
3. Quickly exit the machine and move to a safe distance away from the machine.
4. Call fire department or mine safety personnel to extinguish the fire.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A039 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

When the fire suppression system is manually discharged, the hydraulic


tank automatic air release will be tripped. This will release the air pressure
in the hydraulic tank and in the rest of the hydraulic system. The automatic
air release valve must be manually reset by pushing the knob IN to the
closed position (refer to illustration "HYDRAULIC TANK AIR RELEASE
VALVE").

FIRE DETECTION ENGINE SHUTDOWN OPTION


The LINCS computer system is equipped with an engine shutdown option that will stop the
machine and shut down the engine when the fire suppressant is discharged. The engine
shutdown option must be enabled or disabled via the LINCS computer system and requires
service technician-level access.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A039 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Fire systems, installed at the LeTourneau, Inc. factory, are manual


discharge systems. The LINCS™ computer system or a LeTourneau, Inc.
factory-installed fire system, WILL NOT automatically discharge the fire
suppressant in the event of a fire. An electronic fire detection option is
available through fire system manufacturers that will audibly and visually
alert the operator of a fire. However, the discharge of fire suppressant and
actuation of the Fire Detection Engine Shutdown Option must be manually
actuated by discharging the fire suppressant with any of the actuator
switches. All operators of the machine should be trained in the operation
and capabilities of the fire suppressant system on the machine before
operation.

If the Fire Detection Engine Shutdown Option is enabled, the following sequence of events will
occur following discharge of the fire suppressant:
1. Propulsion is disabled.
2. Dynamic brake boost is actuated.
3. The automatic air release valve will release hydraulic tank pressure.
4. The engine will shut down once wheel motor speed is less than 100-rpm.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
The fire suppression system requires regular inspection and maintenance. The manufacturer’s
recommended maintenance schedules are also located in the owner’s manual, which may be
obtained from the manufacturer’s website. System troubleshooting and wiring information is
also provided in the manufacturer’s owner’s manual appended to this publication.

Only personnel trained by the system’s manufacturer should service the


system. Certain components of the system contain an explosive charge
that can cause serious personal injury if not handled properly. Electronic
components of the system can also be damaged if not handled in the
proper manner.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A040 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIRE PREVENTION AND CONTROL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Before performing welding operations or jumpstarting the machine, the


circuit monitor panel’s in-line fuse must be removed. Failure to do so may
cause the system to actuate and/or damage the solid-state components of
the system. Replace the in-line fuse after the machine has been started or
welding operations have been completed.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A040 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 20 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

AFEX CAB MOUNTED FIRING ANSUL CAB MOUNTED DISCHARGE


MECHANISM WITH CIRCUIT MONITORING MECHANISM
PANEL (CHARGE BOTTLE NOT SHOWN)
(CHARGE BOTTLE NOT SHOWN – REFER TO
ILLUSTRATION "AFEX CIRCUIT MONITOR PANEL")

AFEX GROUND LEVEL MANUAL FIRING ANSUL GROUND LEVEL MANUAL


MECHANISM FIRING MECHANISM
(MOUNTED ON ELECTRICAL CONTROL CABINET (BOTH SIDES OF MACHINE – REFER TO
LEFT SIDE OF TOW UNIT – ADDITIONAL ILLUSTRATION "LOCATIONS OF FIRE
MECHANISM MOUNTED ON HYDRAULIC TANK SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ACTUATION
RIGHT SIDE)(ALSO SEE NOTE BELOW.) SWITCHES")(ALSO SEE NOTE BELOW.)
Figure 20. TYPICAL FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ACTUATOR SWITCHES - AFEX
AND ANSUL SYSTEMS

SOME SYSTEMS ON VARIOUS MACHINE MODELS HAVE FIRING MECHANISM


MOUNTED IN SAME GENERAL LOCATION ON UNDERSIDE OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL
CABINET.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A041 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURES 21 & 22 1
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 002A042 (p)


Figure 21. AFEX CIRCUIT MONITOR PANEL

REFER TO TA9307 FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION


1. HYDRAULIC TANK
2. REAR CAB WALL
3. LADDER BOX

Additional actuation switches may be provided at other locations to meet


customer requirements. Check your machine and make note of all switch
locations.
Figure 22. LOCATIONS OF FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ACTUATION SWITCHES
(TYPICAL LOCATIONS - STANDARD INSTALLATION)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 002A042 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA9852-8

AFEXFire Suppression System PN A725900


Circuit Monitor Panel

POWER TROUBLE

ALARM DETECTION HORN

DISCHARGE
SQUIB
WARNING

PUSH TO SYSTEM ALARM


TEST RESET SILENCE

TA9852

TA9852-8
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A042 ( p1 )
TA9307

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

3
TA9307

TA9307CG
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 002A042 ( p2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SECTION 3
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS & OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND


OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
LETOURNEAU, INC.
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER
OSL-3

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SCOPE OF THIS PUBLICATION
OVERVIEW OF OPERATIONAL CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
LEFT-HAND JOYSTICK CONTROL – DIRECTIONAL CONTROL
TURN SIGNAL SWITCHES
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL SWITCH
RIGHT-HAND JOYSTICK CONTROL – HOIST AND BUCKET CONTROL
HOIST AND BUCKET CONTROL USING JOYSTICK
HOIST AND BUCKET CONTROL USING SWITCHES
HORN BUTTON – LOWER BUTTON
BACK DRAG SWITCH – RIGHT SIDE OF JOYSTICK
INSTRUMENT PANEL
OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
HOURMETER
LINCS COMPUTER SYSTEM AND COMPUTER KEYPAD PANEL
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION SCREEN
PRODUCTION DATA SCREEN
OPERATOR NOTICE SCREENS
MAIN MENU SCREEN
ALARM SCREEN AND RED ALARM LIGHT
WARNING SCREEN AND AMBER WARNING LIGHT
PM ALERT LIGHT – BLUE
KEY SWITCH
PARK BRAKE CONTROL

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A001 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS & OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

CAB CONSOLE SELECTOR SWITCH PANEL


BUCKET AUTO LEVEL SWITCH
BUCKET HEIGHT (ALTERNATE HEIGHT LIMIT) SWITCH
AUXILIARY PILOT PUMP SWITCH
GROUND FAULT TEST SWITCH (Optional)
ETHER INJECTION SWITCH (Optional)
MANUAL LUBE SWITCH
ENGINE SELECT (THROTTLE) SWITCH
SHOP MODE SWITCH
CAB AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
CLIMATE CONTROLS OPERATION
OVERHEAD ROCKER SWITCH PANEL
TRAVEL LIGHTS SWITCH
FLOODLIGHTS SWITCH
BEACON LIGHT SWITCH
PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
FRONT WINDSHIELD WIPER DELAY SWITCH
FRONT WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH
REAR WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH
WINDSHIELD WASHER SWITCH
CIGARETTE LIGHT/POWER PORT
AM/FM RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (Optional)
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCH
CAB DOME LIGHTS
AUXILIARY/SERVICE BRAKE AND DYNAMIC BRAKE BOOST PEDAL
AUXILIARY (EMERGENCY) STEERING SYSTEM (Optional)
POT FAIL/LOCKOUT ALARM
OPERATOR’S SEAT
AUTOMATIC AND MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENTS
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
FLOOD AND TRAVEL LIGHTS
LADDER, STAIRCASE AND WORK AREA LIGHTING

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A001 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS & OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

POWERED ACCESS LADDER


NORMAL OPERATION
EMERGENCY OPERATION
MANUAL RELEASE
SERVICE
DAILY INSPECTIONS
WEEKLY INSPECTIONS
ANNUAL SERVICE
CLEANING
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS
COMPUTER MONITOR AND PANEL
DIESEL ENGINE OPERATIONAL CONCERNS
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM MONITORING AND OPERATIONAL CONCERNS
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AUXILIARY OIL COOLER (Optional)
DRIVE MOTOR OPERATIONAL CONCERNS
OVERSPEED PREVENTION
STALL BURN PREVENTION
WALK-AROUND INSPECTION
DYNAMIC BRAKING
BUCKET ROLLBACK STOPS AND BELLCRANK STOPS
BASIC MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NON-MATERIAL HANDLING
OPERATIONS
PRE-STARTING PROCEDURES
STARTING THE ENGINE
STARTING DETROIT DIESEL-EQUIPPED MACHINES
STARTING CUMMINS ENGINES-EQUIPPED MACHINES
AFTER STARTING THE ENGINE
OPERATING THE LOADER (NON-MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS)
CHANGING DIRECTIONS (FORWARD AND REVERSE)
NORMAL SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
BASIC MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTION MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS
GENERAL MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS AND PRECAUTIONS
LOADING THE BUCKET
HOISTING THE LOAD
DUMPING THE LOAD
LOWERING THE BUCKET
DOS AND DON’TS
POWERED ACCESS LADDER - VENDOR LITERATURE
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS - VENDOR LITERATURE

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A001 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS & OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 1. JOYSTICK OPERATION
Figure 2. CAB CONTROL CONSOLE
Figure 3. LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREENS
Figure 4. OPERATOR’S CAB ROOF – COMPONENT LOCATIONS
Figure 5. OVERHEAD ROCKER SWITCH PANEL
Figure 6. CAB EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH
Figure 7. HYDRAULIC TANK AIR RELEASE VALVES
Figure 8. OPERATOR’S SEAT
Figure 9. FLOOD AND TRAVEL LIGHTS
Figure 10. LADDER, STAIRCASE AND WORK AREA LIGHTING
Figure 11. LADDER SWITCHES
Figure 12. POWERED ACCESS LADDER
Figure 13. LADDER MANUAL RELEASE
Figure 14. LADDER LOCKOUT SWITCH AND FLUID LEVEL SIGHT GLASS
Figure 15. RADIATOR SURGE TANK AIR RELEASE BALL VALVE
Figure 16. OPTIONAL JUMPSTART SOCKET – TWO MODEL OPTIONS
Figure 17. TYPICAL TRAVEL SPEEDS CAUTION SIGN
Figure 18. BUCKET ROLLBACK AND BELLCRANK STOP BLOCK INSPECTION
Figure 19. BUCKET LOADING

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A001 ( d 4 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SCOPE, OVERVIEW OF OPERATIONAL CONTROLS & LEFT- 1_2
Training only! Always use yourHAND
machineJOYSTICK
original documentation!

SCOPE OF THIS PUBLICATION


DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS contains the
identification and function of the controls, instruments and indicators on the instrument panel.
This publication also contains basic instructions for non-material and material handling
operations. It is essential that the operator(s) receive the following instructions and training
before operating the machine in material handling operations:
• It is essential that the operator(s) read and understand the information contained in
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS before operating the machine.
• The operator(s) must acquire a thorough knowledge of the function of each control and
each indicator light described in this SERVICE MANUAL before operating the machine.
• The operator(s) must also be trained in the complete operation of the machine and any
special requirements of the particular job site where the machine will be operated before
operating the machine in material handling operations.
• The operator(s) must read and understand any special starting, operating and
maintenance instructions contained in the engine manufacturer operator’s manual.

OVERVIEW OF OPERATIONAL CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS


The following provides a brief overview of the operator’s controls and instruments of the
Loader:
• The Loader is equipped with joystick controls for hoist, bucket and steering functions.
The joystick controls are mounted on the armrests of the operator’s seat.
• Ground speed and dynamic braking are controlled by a foot-operated accelerator pedal.
The accelerator pedal is pressed to move the machine and released to actuate dynamic
braking. A service brake pedal is provided for holding the machine on grades or when in
close proximity to a transport vehicle.
• Switches for controlling various lights, accessories and other service functions of the
loader are mounted on the operator’s console and an overhead panel.
• An analog instrument panel provides pertinent information such as ground speed,
hourmeter, engine oil pressure, engine coolant temperature, fuel level and compressed
air system pressure.
• The operator is alerted to a potential problem that might require the shutdown of the
machine or the call for repair by warning lights, an audible alarm and text messages on
a computer monitor. The computer monitor provides repair technicians with operational
data and fault messages in the event of a mechanical, electrical or electronic
malfunction.
• The operator’s cab is pressurized and has an automatic climate control system.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A003 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SCOPE, OVERVIEW OF OPERATIONAL CONTROLS & LEFT- 1_2
Training only! Always use yourHAND
machineJOYSTICK
original documentation!

LEFT-HAND JOYSTICK CONTROL - DIRECTIONAL CONTROL


(Refer to illustration "JOYSTICK OPERATION")

The left and right sides of the loader are determined when standing behind
it or sitting in the operator’s seat — not from standing in front and facing
it. Engine left and right bank are determined by viewing the engine from
the flywheel end.

• Moving the directional joystick control to the left from center steers the loader to the
left.
• Moving the directional joystick control to the right from center steers the loader to the
right.
• The speed of steering is proportional to the distance the joystick is moved from center.
• The directional joystick control automatically returns to center when released;
however, only the speed of steering will stop and the loader will not steer back straight
unless the joystick is moved past center in the opposite direction.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCHES


Two momentary pushbutton switches are located on top of the left joystick to actuate the turn
signal lights on the front and rear of the loader. These switches have yellow covers.
• Pressing the left button actuates the red left turn signal light on the rear of the loader, the
left turn signal light on the front of the loader and the left arrow indicators on the
instrument panel.
• Pressing the right button actuates the red right turn signal light on the rear of the loader,
the right turn signal light on the front of the loader and the right arrow indicators on the
instrument panel.
• Pressing either button a second time will cancel the turn signal. When the loader is
steered back straight, the turn signal will also cancel. Refer to Item 3 on illustration
"CAB CONTROL CONSOLE".

DIRECTIONAL CONTROL SWITCH


The directional control switch is a three-position maintained rocker-type switch mounted on the
steering joystick control. It is used to select forward or reverse direction of machine
movement.
• Pressing the switch forward selects FORWARD machine movement.
• Pressing the switch backward selects REVERSE machine movement. When the
directional switch is moved to the reverse position, the back up alarm will sound and the
back up lights will come on. They will remain on until the switch is moved to the neutral
or forward position.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A003 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SCOPE, OVERVIEW OF OPERATIONAL CONTROLS & LEFT- 1_2
Training only! Always use yourHAND
machineJOYSTICK
original documentation!

• The machine’s direction, FORWARD or REVERSE, can be selected without releasing


the accelerator. Once the directional control switch is moved to the opposite direction,
the machine’s control system automatically applies dynamic braking, slows the loader to
a complete stop and then changes the machine’s direction. While this change of
direction is being processed by the control system, the accelerator pedal can remain fully
depressed. This will ensure that cycle times are maximized and there is no wasted time
selecting direction.
• The center position is the neutral position. The directional switch must be in the center
position to start the engine. When the switch is in the center position, the loader will not
move in either direction if the accelerator is pressed.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A003 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERVIEW OF CONTROLS...CONT'D RIGHT-HAND JOYSTICK 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
CONTROLS

RIGHT-HAND JOYSTICK CONTROL - HOIST AND BUCKET CONTROL


(Refer to illustration "JOYSTICK OPERATION")
The dual-axis hoist control joystick has forward and backward positions for hoisting and
lowering the lift arms with side-to-side positions for bucket rollback and dumping. Hoisting and
floating down the lift arms and rollback and dumping the bucket can also be controlled by using
the pushbuttons and roller switch on top of the joystick. The horn button is also located on the
hoist control joystick.

HOIST AND BUCKET CONTROL USING JOYSTICK


• Moving the hoist control joystick backward from neutral (center) will cause the lift arms to
RISE.
• Moving the hoist control joystick forward from neutral (center) will cause the lift arms to
LOWER (power down). To lower a loaded bucket, the joystick must be moved forward.
• Speed of lift arm and bucket movement is proportional to the distance the joystick is
moved from neutral (center). The further the joystick is moved from center the faster the
lift arms or bucket move in the commanded direction.
• The center position is the neutral position. Moving the hoist control joystick toward the
center position will cause the lift arms to slow. When the joystick reaches center, the lift
arms will stop. The hoist control joystick automatically returns to center when released.
• Moving the joystick to the left, while the joystick is in any of the three positions described
above, will cause the bucket to roll back. The rollback position is used to load the
bucket. This is the position the bucket should be in when transporting a load.
• Moving the joystick to the right, while the joystick is in any of the three positions
described above, will cause the bucket to dump.

HOIST AND BUCKET CONTROL USING SWITCHES


Hoist and bucket movements can also be controlled by using the two pushbutton switches and
the roller switch on the joystick control.

Joystick commands override switch commands.

• HOIST CONTROL SWITCH - Top Button: The hoist control switch is a momentary
pushbutton switch that causes the hoist to rise to the height determined by the bucket
height switch or to full height if the bucket height switch is in the OFF position. The lift
arms will rise at a predetermined speed. Speed of hoist movement is NOT proportional
when using the hoist control switch. The hoist control switch will reset when the lift arms
reach either the preset height or full height, as applicable. The hoist control switch will
also reset if hoist joystick is moved to hoist down or hoist up position.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A004 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERVIEW OF CONTROLS...CONT'D RIGHT-HAND JOYSTICK 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
CONTROLS

• FLOAT CONTROL SWITCH - Center Button: The float control switch is a momentary
pushbutton switch. Pressing this switch while the lift arms are above horizontal, with
auto leveling enabled, will cause the bucket to descend to the ground and level. The
bucket will not free fall under this condition but will descend as rapidly as fluid being
expelled from the lift cylinders will allow. Pressing this switch while the lift arms are
below horizontal, with auto leveling enabled, will only level the bucket. This switch is
inoperative if pressed while the bucket is loaded or if auto leveling is disabled. To lower
a loaded bucket, the joystick must be moved forward (power down).
• BUCKET CONTROL ROLLER POTENTIOMETER: The spring-centered roller
potentiometer controls bucket rollback and dump movements. Rolling the potentiometer
back from center rotates the mouth of the bucket upward (roll back). The rollback
position is used to load the bucket. This is the position the bucket should be in when
transporting a load. Rolling the potentiometer forward from center rotates the mouth of
the bucket downward (dump). Bucket rollback and dump movements are proportional to
how far the potentiometer is rolled forward or back from neutral (center). Releasing the
potentiometer will cause it to return to the neutral (center) position. Bucket movement
will stop at the position where the potentiometer is released. To move the bucket in the
opposite direction, the potentiometer must be rolled either forward or backward, as
required. If the float control switch is pressed or the lift arms lowered with the joystick
(power down) the bucket will automatically level.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A004 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 1 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 003A005 (p)


Figure 1. JOYSTICK OPERATION

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
2005 All Rights 50 SERIES DIGITAL
LeTourneau, Inc. 003A005 ( d 1 )
Reserved LOADER
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
TA1

NOTE ! NOTE !
BUCKET WILL AUTOMATICALLY FLOAT CONTROL SWITCH IS
LOWER , IF AUTO LEVEL INOPERATIVE WHEN BUCKET
SWITCH IS ON. IS LOADED.
TO LOWER A LOADED BUCKET
MOVE JOYSTICK FORWARD.

MOVE LIFTARMS LOWERING


FORWARD NOTE ! (JOYSTICK OR SWITCH ACTUATION)
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL
SWITCH MUST BE IN
LEFT TURN RIGHT TURN CENTER POSITION TO
SIGNAL SWITCH SIGNAL SWITCH START ENGINE. HOIST CONTROL SWITCH
BUCKET ROLLBACK & DUMP
(ROLLER OR THUMB WHEEL) BACK DRAG SWITCH
FLOAT CONTROL
DIRECTIONAL SWITCH
CONTROL
HORN SWITCH
SWITCH
(VEHICLE
MOTION)

LEFT TURN LEFT STEER RIGHT STEER RIGHT TURN BUCKET BUCKET
SIGNAL SIGNAL ROLLBACK DUMP
(JOYSTICK OR ROLLER) (JOYSTICK OR ROLLER)

THIS STICK MOVES ONLY


LEFT OR RIGHT
HOIST CONTROL SWITCH

NOTE !
JOYSTICK ACTUATION
OVERRIDES THIS
SWITCH COMMAND

MOVE LIFTARMS RISING


BACKWARD (JOYSTICK OR SWITCH ACTUATION)

LEFT- HAND JOYSTICK RIGHT - HAND JOYSTICK


VEHICLE DIRECTIONAL CONTROL LIFTARM & BUCKET CONTROL
JOYSTICK RETURNS TO NEUTRAL JOYSTICK RETURNS TO NEUTRAL
POSITION WHEN RELEASED POSITION WHEN RELEASED TA10076

JOYSTICK CONTROLS
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 003A005 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
TABBLANK

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service information documents. Make sure
you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER TABLOID BLANK PAGE ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERVIEW OF OPERATIONAL CONTROLS...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
HORN BUTTON - LOWER BUTTON
Pressing the lower momentary pushbutton causes the air horn to sound. When the switch is
released, the air horn silences.
BACK DRAG SWITCH - RIGHT SIDE OF JOYSTICK
The back drag switch is a two-position momentary pushbutton switch. Pressing this switch
allows the lift arms to move up and down as the bucket contacts the pit floor when reversing
the machine.

INSTRUMENT PANEL (Refer to illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE")


OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (1)
The oil pressure gauge indicates the oil pressure in the engine lubricating oil system in U.S.A.
and metric units. When the engine is hot and operating at low idle speed, an oil pressure
indication below 30 psi (2 bars) is not abnormal. When the engine select switch is moved to
the HI position, after engine start-up and warm-up, the oil pressure may indicate as high as
100 psi (7 bars) immediately after HI throttle is selected. The pressure will decrease as the oil
warms up. An oil pressure approximately 60 psi (4 bars) is normal after the oil has warmed up.

When operating in cold climates, the oil pressure indications will be higher
after starting, during engine warm-up, and when HI throttle is selected. It
will take longer for the oil to warm-up and for the oil pressure to reach
normal operating temperature.
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE (2)
This gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature in U.S.A. and metric units. Normal
operating temperature is a minimum of 160ºF to a maximum of 190ºF (71ºC to 88ºC).
TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS (3)
The turn signal indicators are arrow-shaped cutouts in each corner of the instrument panel. A
flashing light glows behind the cutouts to indicate the turn signal lights are flashing. The lights
go out when the turn signal switch is turned off or the signal is canceled by steering the loader
straight.
SPEEDOMETER (4)
The speedometer indicates the speed of the loader in miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers
(KPH) when the loader is traveling in either forward or reverse direction.
FUEL GAUGE (5)
This gauge indicates the amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
AIR PRESSURE GAUGE (6)
The air pressure gauge indicates the air pressure available for operation of the air-powered
components such as service brakes (L-1350-L-1850) KLENZ™ filtration system, horn, etc.
The gauge is marked in U.S.A. and metric units. The indication should be 120 to 130 psi (8 to
9 bars) during operation.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A007 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERVIEW OF OPERATIONAL CONTROLS...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

During normal operation, if the air pressure gauge continues to show an air
pressure drop (below 80 psi, the amber warning light and audible alarm will
come on), stop the machine and check the filler cap on the hydraulic
reservoir.

To check the filler cap on the hydraulic oil reservoir, use the following
procedure:
a. Release the air pressure from the reservoir by moving the
manual air release valve to the open position (vented). The
manual air release valve (refer to illustration "HYDRAULIC TANK
AIR RELEASE VALVES") is located on top of the hydraulic oil
reservoir in front of the oil return filters. The air pressure in the
reservoir will be released, and at the same time, the valve will
lock in the air pressure in the rest of the system.
b. Tighten the reservoir cap with your hand.
c. Move the manual air release valve handle to the closed position
to pressurize the reservoir.
d. If there is still a drop in air pressure, ask for a maintenance
check.

HOURMETER (7)
The purpose of the hourmeter is to record a cumulative total of engine running time. The
hourmeter will operate any time the engine is running.
LINCS COMPUTER SYSTEM AND COMPUTER KEYPAD PANEL
(Refer to illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE")
The computer monitor (27) and keypad panel (11) are connected to the LeTourneau, Inc.
LINCS™ Computer System. The computer keypad panel contains three indicator lights (8, 9 &
10), the key switch (12) and the parking brake control (13). The computer system is actuated
when the key switch is turned to the ON position. Text messages providing operational data,
warnings and alarms are displayed on the computer monitor. The operator can access various
capabilities of the computer by using the keypad.

The LINCS™ computer system is programmed to fit the application and


needs of the customer; therefore, the following instructions are somewhat
general in nature and based on the most common set-up sequence for the
various capabilities of the system. The computer screens shown in
illustration "LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREENS" represent examples only and
actual screen text may vary.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A007 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SYSTEM INITIALIZATION SCREEN


(Refer to illustration "LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREEN" Item A)
The system initialization screen displayed on the computer monitor each time that the key
switch (refer to illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE") is turned from the OFF position to the
ON position. The screen shows the status of the LINCS™ initialization process. LINCS™
performs a number of self-diagnostics at start-up to ensure that all electronics on the machine
are performing correctly before any normal machine operations are allowed.

PRODUCTION DATA SCREEN


(Refer to illustration "LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREEN" Item B)
After the “boot up” interval, the production data screen replaces the system initialization screen
on the monitor. The production data screen remains on the monitor during loader operation
and provides pertinent operational data. The data layout on the production data screen can be
altered to three different configurations by accessing the system setup option of the main
menu, as described below.

OPERATOR NOTICE SCREENS


(Refer to illustration "LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREEN" Item C)
The notice screens provide the operator with any additional information pertaining to the
current operations of the machine; for example, notice screens like “Cranking Disabled by
Forward Selected,” “Steering Disabled by Park Brakes Set,” “Propel Disabled by Ladder Down”
will be displayed whenever an operator command is disallowed by a safety prerequisite. The
operator can acknowledge the notice screen by pressing any key on the keypad (refer to
illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE"). This will clear the notice from the screen. Some
notice screens will also clear themselves from the screen automatically.

MAIN MENU SCREEN


(Refer to illustration "LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREEN" Item D)
The main menu screen is accessed by touching the “1” button on the keypad (see toolbar at
lower left side of screen in illustration "LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREEN", Item “D”). When
activated, the main menu screen will appear over the production data screen. The main menu
screen provides a list of various data that can be reviewed by the operator and other functions
of the computer that are available to the operator, as described below:
1. VIEW LOG: The view log option provides a list of production data stored in the
computer by operator’s individual access codes. The operator or supervisor can view
this data by using the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the various data
screens (not shown).
2. VIEW ACTIVE ALARMS: The view active alarms option provides a list of active alarms
that triggered the red alarm light, alarm screen and audible alarm. The alarms are
logged in order of occurrence and whether or not they have been acknowledged by the
operator (not shown).
3. VIEW ACTIVE WARNINGS: The view active warnings option provides a list of active
warnings that triggered the amber warning light, warning screen and audible alarm.
The warnings are logged in order of occurrence and whether or not they have been
acknowledged by the operator (not shown).
4. VIEW PM ALERTS: The view active PM alerts option provides a list of active PM
Alerts that triggered the blue PM alert light. The PM alert light is not accompanied by a
text screen, and the operator or maintenance personnel must access the view active

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A008 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
PM alerts screen through the main menu screen to acknowledge the alert. The blue
light will continue to illuminate until the fault is cleared and the light turned off by
maintenance personnel. The alerts are logged in order or occurrence and whether or
not they have been acknowledged by the operator or maintenance personnel (not
shown).

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A008 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 2 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

REFER TO TA-9928-8 FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION


1. OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
2. WATER TEMPERATURE INDICATORS
3. TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS
4. SPEEDOMETER
5. FUEL GAUGE
6. AIR PRESSURE GAUGE
7. HOURMETER
8. RED ALARM LIGHT
9. AMBER WARNING LIGHT
10. BLUE PM ALERT LIGHT
11. KEY PAD
12. KEY SWITCH
13. PARK BRAKE CONTROL
14. BUCKET AUTO LEVEL SWITCH
15. BUCKET HEIGHT SWITCH
16. AUXILIARY PILOT PUMP SWITCH
17. GROUND FAULT TEST SWITCH
18. ETHER INJECTION SWITCH (OPTIONAL)
19. MANUAL LUBRICATION SWITCH
20. ENGINE SELECT (THROTTLE) SWITCH
21. SHOP MODE SWITCH
22. CLIMATE CONTROL KEY PAD
23. DIGITAL READOUT
24. DEFROSTER VENT CONTROL KNOB
25. DASH VENT CONTROL KNOB
26. FLOOR VENT CONTROL KNOB
27. COMPUTER MONITOR
28. CIGARETTE LIGHTER/POWER PORT
29. HOIST AND BUCKET JOYSTICK CONTROL
30. ACCELERATOR PEDAL
31. DIRECTIONAL JOYSTICK CONTROL
32. BRAKE PEDAL
Figure 2. CAB CONTROL CONSOLE

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
2005 All Rights 50 SERIES DIGITAL
LeTourneau, Inc. 003A009 ( d 1 )
Reserved LOADER
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
3 4
14 15 16 17

2 5 13

10

12

1 6

11 18 19 20 21

27

24

25
30 29

32

28
26

31

22 23 TA9928-8

TA9928-8
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 003A009 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
TABBLANK

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service information documents. Make sure
you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER TABLOID BLANK PAGE ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
5,6,7 BROWSE AND INSPECT CHANNELS: The browse and inspect channels options
enable the operator or maintenance personnel to view the operating parameters
of the monitored mechanical, electrical, electronic and hydraulic components and
other functions of the machine. The monitored components and other functions
are displayed in related groups. This information is primarily of interest to
maintenance and repair personnel.
8. MAINTENANCE MENU: Access to the maintenance menu option is normally
restricted to maintenance and repair personnel. Various mechanical, electrical,
electronic and hydraulic components and other functions of the machine can be
programmed through this option to accommodate the requirements of the loader’s
working environment (not shown).
9. SYSTEM SETUP: The system setup option provides the operator the ability to
change various functions of the computer screen format such as date and time,
production data screen format, Imperial, SI, or metric units of measurement, etc.
(not shown).
To exit the main menu screen and return to the production data screen, touch the “0” key on
the computer keypad (11).

Additional information on using the main menu functions is provided in


HOW TO ACCESS AND NAVIGATE THE MAIN MENU.

ALARM SCREEN AND RED ALARM LIGHT


(Refer to illustrations "LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREENS" Item E and to "CAB CONTROL
CONSOLE" Item 8)
Should a serious problem occur which warrants immediate shutdown to avoid machine
damage, an alarm screen will appear on the computer monitor, the red indicator light will
illuminate and an audible alarm will sound. Propulsion is inhibited when the red alarm light
illuminates and the audible alarm sounds. The machine will come to an abrupt stop. Should
this occur, SHUT THE ENGINE DOWN as quickly as possible.
The alarm screen includes a brief text message to alert the operator to the nature of the
problem. The operator can silence the audible alarm and remove the text message from the
screen by pressing any key on the computer keypad. The alarm screen will not longer appear
but the light will continue to illuminate until the system is accessed by repair technicians and
the fault is cleared.
The number of currently active warnings appears on the status bar located at the bottom of the
screen. The alarms are logged into the view active alarms option of the main menu in order of
occurrence.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A011 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
WARNING SCREEN AND AMBER WARNING LIGHT
(Refer to illustrations "LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREENS" Item F and to "CAB CONTROL
CONSOLE" Item 9)
The warning screen, amber warning light and audible alarm indicate a problem that may not
require immediate shut down of the engine but MUST BE INVESTIGATED and addressed
immediately.
The warning screen includes a brief text message to alert the operator to the nature of the
problem. The operator can silence the audible alarm and remove the text message from the
screen by pressing any key on the computer keypad. The warning screen will no longer
appear but the light will continue to illuminate until the system is accessed by repair
technicians and the fault is cleared.
Additional text may be displayed on a notice screen (refer to illustration "LINCS™ COMPUTER
SCREENS") after all of the warning screens have been acknowledged. This text will give the
operator additional information about the warning screen(s) and may suggest appropriate
action for correcting the problem. For example, if the warning screen said “Motor 1 Speed
High,” the notice screen will say “Slow Machine”. The additional text is logged with the
associated warnings for later review.
The number of currently active warnings appears on the status bar located at the bottom of the
screen. The warnings are logged into the view active warnings option of the main menu in
order of occurrence.

It is possible to see a similar text message on either an alarm or warning


screen. For example, bucket rollback pilot pressure high, as shown on the
warning screen in illustration "LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREENS", can also
be seen on an alarm screen if the problem becomes serious enough to
warrant immediate shutdown of the machine.
PM ALERT LIGHT - BLUE (10)
(Refer to illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE")
The blue PM alert light indicates a problem which should be addressed at the next scheduled
service interval. The machine does not require immediate shutdown. The audible alarm will
not sound and no text message accompanies the PM alert light. However, the number of PM
alerts is registered on the status bar at the bottom of the screen and the nature of the alerts is
logged into the view active PM alerts option of the main menu in order of occurrence.
The operator and maintenance personnel can determine the nature of the PM alerts by
accessing the main menu and then accessing the view active PM alerts option. The blue light
will continue to illuminate until the problem is corrected by maintenance technicians and the
fault cleared.

The red, amber and blue indicator lights will illuminate when the key switch
is turned to the ON position. Within 50 seconds of turning the key switch
to the ON position, the lights should go out unless a fault exists.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A011 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
HELP SCREENS: Should the operator need additional information, a “HELP” screen can be
initiated by pressing the “?” button on the keypad (11).
KEY SWITCH (12)
The key switch has three positions: OFF, ON, and START.
• The ON position turns on the electrical power to the instrument panel circuits, LINCS™
Computer System and electronic governor, allowing fuel flow to the injectors.
• The START position is a momentary position.
To start the engine:
(1) Place the engine select switch in the LO position,
(2) Set the parking brake,
(3) Move the directional switch to the center (neutral) position,
(4) Turn the key switch right to START. Once the engine starts release the switch. The
switch will return to the ON position.

Cummins engines will NOT start immediately when the key switch is turned
to the START position. Refer to STARTING CUMMINS ENGINE EQUIPPED
MACHINES.

• To stop the engine under normal conditions:


(1) Stop the machine.
(2) Set the park brake.
(3) Place the engine select switch in the LO position.
(4) Turn the key switch to the OFF position. Turning the key switch to the OFF
position activates the idle timer if the engine has been running for three minutes
or more. Any warning, alarm or notice screens must be acknowledged by the
operator before the idle timer will actuate. The idle timer will allow the engine to
run at LO throttle for five minutes to cool the turbochargers. The LINCS™
Computer System will remain booted up. When the idle timer is activated, the
computer monitor will provide a screen indicating that the idle timer is operating.
After five minutes, the engine fuel flow to the injectors will stop, which will stop
the engine. The LINCS™ Computer System will remain booted up for an
additional 45 seconds. During this 45-second interval, the key switch can be
switched back to the ON position and the LINCS™ Computer System will remain
booted up. This function saves waiting the normal two- minute boot-up time to
complete service work, data transmission, etc. If the key switch is not switched
back to the ON position during the 45-second interval, the LINCS™ Computer
System will switch off and the power to the instrument panel is cut. If the key
switch is turned back to ON position to keep the LINCS™ Computer System
booted up, turning it back to the OFF position will immediately cut power to the
LINCS™ Computer System and instrument panel.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A012 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

The idle timer can be bypassed by pressing “0” on the computer keypad.
This will shut down the engine and LINCS™ Computer System and cut
power to the instrument panel immediately. Bypassing the idle timer can
cause damage to the turbochargers. Shutting the engine down
immediately should only be done in emergency situations.

PARK BRAKE CONTROL (13)


The park brake switch is a push-pull type switch that has a red light inside it. The park brakes
are spring/air operated on Models L-1350-L-1850 and are spring/oil operated on Model L-
2350.
• Pulling the control OUT sets the park brake. The red light in the switch will glow red
when the switch is pulled out. When the control is pulled out, the drive motor brakes are
set and the drive system is inhibited.
• Pushing the Park Brake control IN releases the parking brakes and enables the drive
system. While the park brake control is pressed IN and the air pressure in the park
brakes is building to a level that will release the brakes, the red light in the park brake
control will flash. When the pressure reaches a level that fully releases the brakes, the
light will go out.
• The park brake must be set before LINCS™ will allow the engine to be cranked.
• If the powered rear access ladder (optional) is not in the full UP and locked position, a
warning message will be generated when the park brakes are released.

The operator should never leave the cab with the park brake released.
Leaving the cab without setting the Park Brake could result in unplanned
and uncontrolled movement of the machine. This could cause loss of life,
serious injury or property damage.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A012 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CAB CONSOLE SELECTOR SWITCH PANEL 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

CAB CONSOLE SELECTOR SWITCH PANEL


(Refer to illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE")
BUCKET AUTO LEVEL SWITCH (14)
The bucket auto level switch is a two-position maintained rocker-type switch. This switch
enables or disables the auto-leveling feature of the bucket.
• When the upper portion of the switch is pressed, the auto-leveling feature is enabled.
• If the auto-leveling feature is switched from disabled to enabled while the bucket is
within ±10 degrees of level to the ground, the current angle of the bucket will be
recorded as the bucket angle to auto level to.
• If the auto-leveling feature is switched from disabled to enabled while the bucket is
within 39 inches (1 meter) of the ground, the current height of the bucket will be
recorded as the height to float to when the float control is engaged.
Manual sight alignment is accomplished by observing the bucket angle gauge on the
production data screen and pressing the bucket control as required.

BUCKET HEIGHT (ALTERNATE HEIGHT LIMIT) SWITCH (15)


The bucket height (alternate height limit) switch is a two-position rocker-type switch. A rotary
transducer is provided on the loader that can be preset to stop the flow of hydraulic fluid to the
bucket cylinders when the bucket reaches a predetermined height. The switch is set to stop
the bucket at the same height during each lifting cycle when the loader is being used to load a
fleet of vehicles of uniform height.
• When the upper portion of the switch is pressed, the alternate height limit function is
enabled and the bucket will stop at the selected height each time. To set the alternate
height limit, hoist the bucket to the desired position and press the upper portion of the
bucket height switch. If the lift arms are above 25 degrees, the height will be recorded
in the loader’s computer and the lift arms will automatically stop at this height whether
using the hoist control switch or joystick to perform hoisting operations. The lift arms
can be raised to full height without resetting the alternate height limit by returning the
joystick to the neutral (center) position and then pulling back on the joystick. If the
alternate height limit function is enabled while the lift arms are below 25 degrees, the
last programmed limit when hoisting, whether using the joystick or the hoist control
switch, will become the alternate height limit.
• When the adjustable height limit function is enabled, after dumping the bucket, the
operator must push the joystick forward or press the float switch to lower and
geometrically level the bucket.
• With the lower portion of the switch depressed, the adjustable height limit function is
disabled. When the switch is in this position, the preset limit switch is bypassed, and
the bucket will rise to the maximum height attainable after the hoist joystick control is
moved to the full back position or the hoist control switch is pressed. The bucket height
switch should also be turned OFF when a fleet of vehicles of varying heights is loaded.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A013 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CAB CONSOLE SELECTOR SWITCH PANEL 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

If the bucket is loaded to 120% of rated capacity hoisting action is


inhibited, the amber light will illuminate, the audible alarm will sound and
the text screen indicating bucket overload will appear on the computer
monitor. The audible alarm can be silenced and the text message removed
from the screen by touching any key on the keypad. However, the amber
light will continue to illuminate.

AUXILIARY PILOT PUMP SWITCH (16)


The auxiliary pilot pump switch is a two-position momentary rocker-type switch. This switch
activates the auxiliary pilot pressure pump motor. Activating this switch will create pilot
pressure necessary to lower the lift arms or neutralize the pressure in the cylinders should the
engine not be operational. To operate this switch, place the key switch in the ON position,
allow LINCS to boot up, press the auxiliary pilot pump switch and then press the hoist and
bucket control switches.

This switch should only be operated when the engine is


NOT running.

GROUND FAULT TEST SWITCH (17) (OPTIONAL)


The ground fault test switch is used to test the machines ability to shut down in the event of a
ground fault in the generator or converter outputs. Should a fault occur, the machine should
begin a shut down process in the following sequence:
a. A one-second delay occurs to insure the fault is real. Then the red dash warning light
comes on, audible alarm sounds, traction is disabled and an alarm screen indicating a
ground fault appears on the LINCS™ computer monitor.
b. The machine goes into the dynamic braking mode if it is moving.
c. When the machine’s speed is below 1/2 MPH, the generator’s output is disabled. The
operator should set the service brakes, shut down the engine and call service.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A013 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 3 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA-9936 TA-9934
ITEM #A ITEM #D

TA-9936 TA-9932
ITEM #B ITEM #E

TA-9933 TA-9937
ITEM #C ITEM #F

ACTUAL SCREEN TEXT AND FORMAT MAY VARY SLIGHTLY FROM EXAMPLES SHOWN
Figure 3. LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREENS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A014 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CAB SONSOLE SELECTOR SWITCH PANEL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

ETHER INJECTION SWITCH (18) (OPTIONAL)


When the optional ether cold starting aid is ordered, a momentary rocker switch labeled ether
injection is mounted on the Control Console. The purpose of the ether is to make starting the
engine easier during cold weather operation. Pushing the switch while starting the engine will
inject one measured charge of ether into the air intake manifold during cranking. When the
button is released, it will return to the OUT position. If the temperature is below 50°F (10°C),
inject one charge of ether during cranking. Another charge may be injected during the next
cranking sequence.

Ether is poisonous and flammable. Breathing ether vapors or repeated


contact of ether with the skin can cause personal injury or death.
• Use ether only in well-ventilated areas.
• Use ether with care to avoid fires.
• DO NOT SMOKE while using ether or changing ether cylinders.
• DO NOT store ether cylinders in the operator’s cab or living
areas.
• DO NOT store ether cylinders in direct sunlight or at
temperatures above 102°F (39°C).
• Discard ether cylinders properly. Do not puncture or burn ether
cylinders; they could explode.
• Keep ether cylinders out of the reach of unauthorized personnel.
• Use ether for cold starting purposes ONLY.

Inject ether ONLY while cranking the engine. Ether starting aid must be
used sparingly. Excessive use of the starting aid could cause excessive
combustion pressures and damages to the engine.

NEVER spray ether-starting aid into the intake of the KLENZ® air filtration
system intake. Serious component damage could result.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A015 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CAB SONSOLE SELECTOR SWITCH PANEL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

MANUAL LUBE SWITCH (19)


The manual lube switch is a two-position momentary rocker-type switch that starts the
automatic lubrication system’s lube cycle. The system will activate the lubrication cycle each
time the switch is pressed. Should there be a problem with the lubrication system, the amber
warning light and audible alarm will come on and a warning message will appear on the
computer screen.
L-1350: Compressed air system pressure must be at least 60 psi to operate the manual lube
switch.
L-1850-L-2350: The engine must be running to operate the manual lube switch.
A switch labeled lubrication cycle is provided on the switch box located at the middle pivot
area, on the left side of the machine. This switch performs the same function as the manual
lube switch.

ENGINE SELECT (THROTTLE) SWITCH (20)


The engine select switch is a two-position maintained rocker-type switch.
• When the upper portion of the switch is pressed HI throttle is selected.
• When the lower portion of the switch is pressed LOW throttle is selected. LOW throttle
must be selected for engine start and warm up.
• The engine select switch must be in HI position when operating the loader.
• When operating the loader in material handling operations, the shop mode switch must
be turned OFF.

SHOP MODE SWITCH (21)


The shop mode switch is a two-position maintained rocker type switch that enables the
operator to maneuver the loader around the maintenance area with the engine speed at a
reduced HI-throttle RPM.
• Shop mode is turned ON when the upper portion of the switch is depressed.
• Shop mode is OFF when the lower portion of the switch is depressed.
• The machine must be stopped and in HI throttle to activate this mode. When the switch
is in the ON position, the shop mode is engaged and the machine will travel at eight
MPH (maximum).
• Moving the switch to the OFF position disengages the shop mode and the engine will
return to HI throttle.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A015 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CAB AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM & OVERHEAD 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine
ROCKER original documentation!
SWITCH PANEL

CAB AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM


(Refer to illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE")
The loader is equipped with an automatic climate control system. Once the system has been
set to desired temperature levels operation is automatic and the unit will not need to be
readjusted unless the operator desires to change the temperature to select a different mode of
operation.

CLIMATE CONTROLS OPERATION


ON/OFF CONTROL - Pressing this control powers the unit.

°C/°F CONTROL - Pressing this control selects either Celsius or Fahrenheit


scale of temperature displayed. A red LED glows to indicate the chosen scale.

TEMPERATURE SET CONTROLS - These controls set the


temperature up or down, as desired for operator comfort.
Once the desired temperature is reached, releasing the
control will set the unit at that temperature.
• ACTUAL TEMPERATURE LED INDICATOR - The unit will display the actual
temperature while in operating mode. A red LED glows to indicate that the
temperature displayed is the actual temperature. The actual temperature is the actual
return air and outside air mixed condition. For example, 200 cfm of 70ºF mixing with
100 cfm of 100ºF outside air will result in 80ºF mixed air condition.
• SET TEMPERATURE LED INDICATOR - To momentarily view the set temperature,
press either of the up/down temperature set controls. A red LED glows to indicate that
the temperature being displayed is the set temperature.

DEFROST/DE-MIST/VENT CONTROL - This control operates both


heater solenoid valves and the cooling cycle to remove moisture from
the air. The compressor will cycle on the evaporator de-ice thermostat
only. A red LED in the upper left corner of the control glows to indicate
this mode of operation is selected. When this control is pressed, vent
air is controlled by using the three twist knobs, to the right of the
automatic control system panel, to select and regulate the flow of air
through the vents as follows:
• The top button (24) controls the flow to the defroster vents.
• The middle knob (25) controls the flow to the dash vent.
• The bottom knob (26) controls the flow to the floor vent.
• Turning the knobs to the right increases air flow.
• Turning the knobs to the left decreases air flow.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A016 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CAB AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM & OVERHEAD 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine
ROCKER original documentation!
SWITCH PANEL

MANUAL HEAT CONTROL - This control operates the heater at the


temperature as set by the operator by pressing the up/down temperature
set control. When this control is enabled, the unit will operate in the
heating mode only. A red LED in the upper left corner of the control glows
to indicate this mode of operation is selected.

AUTO CONTROL - This control signals that the unit is in automatically


cycling heating or cooling as set by the operator by pressing the up/down
temperature set keys. A red LED in the upper left corner of the control
glows to indicate this mode of operation is selected.

MANUAL A/C CONTROL - This control enables the condenser fan and the
compressor relays to operate according to the thermostat. When this control
is enabled, the unit will operate in the air conditioning (cooling) mode only.
A red LED in the upper left corner of the control glows to indicate this mode
of operation is selected.

FAN SPEED CONTROL - This control adjusts the fan speed to one of three
speeds. A red LED indicates the chosen speed (Low, Medium or High).

OVERHEAD ROCKER SWITCH PANEL


(Refer to illustrations "OVERHEAD ROCKER SWITCH PANEL" and
"OPERATOR'S CAB ROOF COMPONENT LOCATIONS")
TRAVEL LIGHTS SWITCH (1)
This is a two-position maintained rocker-type switch that operates the lower pole lights
mounted forward of the cab and the red taillights (LED design) on the rear of the machine.
• When the top portion of the switch is pressed down, the lights are ON.
• When the lower portion of the switch is pressed down, the lights are OFF.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A016 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CAB AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM & OVERHEAD 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine
ROCKER original documentation!
SWITCH PANEL

Figure 4. OPERATOR’S CAB ROOF – COMPONENT LOCATIONS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A016 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERHEAD ROCKER SWITCH PANEL...CONT'D & 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original
FIGURE 4 documentation!

REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 003A017 (p)


1. TRAVEL LIGHT SWITCH
2. FLOODLIGHT SWITCH
3. BEACON LIGHT SWITCH
4. PANEL DIMMER SWITCH
5. NOT USED – PLUGGED
6. FRONT WIPER DELAY SWITCH
7. FLOAT WIPER SWITCH
8. REAR WIPER SWITCH
9. WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH
Figure 5. OVERHEAD ROCKER SWITCH PANEL
REFER TO ILLUSTRATION "OPERATOR'S CAB ROOF COMPONENT LOCATIONS"

FLOODLIGHTS SWITCH (2)


This is a two-position maintained rocker-type switch that operates the upper pole lights
mounted forward of the cab the cab side lights mounted atop the mirror bar and the rear
floodlights mounted atop the rear cowl.
• When the top portion of the switch is pressed down, the lights are ON.
• When the lower portion of the switch is pressed down, the lights are OFF.

BEACON LIGHT SWITCH (3)


This is a two-position maintained rocker-type switch that operates the flashing beacon
mounted on top of the operator’s cab.
• When the top portion of the switch is pressed, the beacon light is ON.
• When the lower portion of the switch is pressed, the beacon light is OFF.

Turn the beacon light on ANYTIME the loader is operating.

When requested, the beacon light switch is furnished to accommodate a


customer installed beacon light with associated wiring.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A017 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERHEAD ROCKER SWITCH PANEL...CONT'D & 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original
FIGURE 4 documentation!

PANEL DIMMER SWITCH (4)


The panel dimmer switch is a three-position momentary rocker-type switch.
• Quickly pushing and releasing the upper portion of the switch brightens the panel lights
one level at a time.
• Holding the upper portion of the switch down will increase the intensity to maximum
brightness.
• Quickly pushing and releasing the lower portion of the switch lowers the intensity of the
panel lights one step at a time.
• Holding the lower portion of the switch down dims the panel lights until they are out.
Releasing the switch allows it to return to the center, neutral position.

FRONT WINDSHIELD WIPER DELAY SWITCH (6)


The front wiper delay switch is a three-position momentary rocker-type switch. This switch
operates only when the front windshield wiper switch is in the LO position.
• Pressing the upper portion of the switch activates the delay function for the front wipers.
• Quickly pressing and releasing the upper portion of the switch causes the wiper delay
time to decrease, in step-by-step intervals, until the wipers are wiping with minimal delay.
• Quickly pressing and releasing the lower portion of the switch increases the delay time of
the wipers, in step-by-step intervals, until they reach the greatest delay.
• Pressing and holding the switch in either direction speeds the adjustment process.
• The center position is the neutral position. The function of the front wiper delay switch is
deactivated when the front wiper switch is turned OFF. When the front wiper delay
switch is deactivated, the wipers will wipe continually when the front wiper switch is
turned to the ON position.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A017 ( d 2 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA9915

TRAVEL FLOOD BEACON PANEL FRONT WIPER FRONT REAR W/W


LIGHT LIGHT DIMMER DELAY WIPER WIPER WASHER

TA-9915

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

TA9915
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 003A017 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERHEAD ROCKER SWITCH PANEL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

FRONT WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH (7)


The front wiper switch is a three-position maintained rocker-type switch.
• When the upper portion of the switch is pressed, the front windshield wipers come ON
and wipe continuously at HI speed.
• When the lower portion of the switch is pressed, the front windshield wipers come ON
and wipe continuously at LO speed. The switch must be in the LO position for the front
wiper delay switch to be operable.
• The center position is the OFF position.

REAR WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH (8)


The rear wiper switch is a two-position rocker-type switch.
• When the upper portion of the switch is pressed, the rear windshield wipers come ON.
• When the lower portion of the switch is pressed the rear wipers are OFF.

WINDSHIELD WASHER SWITCH (9)


The windshield wiper switch is a three-position momentary rocker-type switch.
• While the upper portion of the switch is pressed, the washer sprays a jet of window
cleaning solvent on the front windshield and the front wiper comes ON.
• While the lower portion of the switch is pressed, the washer sprays a jet of window
washing solvent on the rear window and the rear wiper comes ON.
• When the switch is released from either position, it returns to the center, which is the
OFF position. When in the OFF position, the washer stops spraying solvent and the
wipers stop.

CIGARETTE LIGHTER/POWER PORT


(Refer to illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE", Item 28)
A 12 VDC cigarette lighter or power port is provided on the far right of the dash panel. To
operate the lighter, push the knob in and release the lighter. When the lighter reaches a preset
temperature, it will snap out to its original position. This indicates the lighter is ready for use.
After using the lighter, reinsert it in the receptacle and push it into the first detent position. The
receptacle can also be use as a 12 VDC power port by removing the lighter element and
inserting the cigarette lighter adapter for the accessory into the receptacle.

AM/FM RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (OPTIONAL)


(Refer to illustration "OPERATOR'S CAB ROOF COMPONENT LOCATIONS")
The AM/FM radio with CD player is mounted overhead in front of the operator’s seat. The
stereo speakers are mounted on the rear cab wall. The radio will operate when the Key
Switch is either in the ON or OFF position.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A018 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERHEAD ROCKER SWITCH PANEL...CONT'D 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCH
(Refer to illustration "EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH")
The emergency shutdown switch is a palm-operated, push button type switch that latches in
the depressed position (twist-to-release). The switch is mounted on the upper left cab wall.
The emergency shutdown switch removes power to all the remotes, which kills the engine,
clamps the drive system and shuts off the AC generator. When the switch is pressed the park
brake will immediately set. Ground-level emergency shutdown switches are optionally
provided. Refer to EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCHES for additional information.

(MOUNTED ON LEFT CAB WALL)


Figure 6. CAB EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH

Use the emergency shutdown switches only in an emergency. Immediate


machine shutdown could result in damage to the engine turbochargers and
traction motors.

When the emergency shutdown circuit is actuated, the hydraulic tank


automatic air release valve (illustration "HYDRAULIC TANK AIR RELEASE
VALVES") is tripped, releasing pressure in the hydraulic tank. This valve
must be manually reset by pushing the reset button IN to the closed
position.

Figure 7. HYDRAULIC TANK AIR RELEASE VALVES

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A018 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CAB DOME LIGHTS, ACC. PEDAL, AUX. SERV. BRAKE, AUX. 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
STEERING

CAB DOME LIGHTS


(Refer to illustration "OPERATOR'S CAB ROOF COMPONENT
LOCATIONS")
Two dome lights are provided in an overhead panel. The lights have two-position push button
switches that are an integral part of the light panel. The lights can be aimed to the desired
position.

ACCELERATOR PEDAL
(Refer to illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE", Item 30)
The right pedal is the accelerator. The accelerator pedal controls speed of movement of the
loader. The speed is proportional to the distance that the accelerator is depressed.
Conversely, as the accelerator is released, the speed of the loader decreases and dynamic
braking occurs, which will bring the loader to a complete stop on flat ground. If stopping on a
grade, the loader may have a tendency to creep. Should this occur, depress the brake pedal
with the left foot, and the loader will come to a dead stop.

The accelerator pedal does not have to be fully released to change


direction of travel (FORWARD or REVERSE). Refer to DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL SWITCH.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A019 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
CAB DOME LIGHTS, ACC. PEDAL, AUX. SERV. BRAKE, AUX. 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
STEERING

AUXILIARY/SERVICE BRAKE AND DYNAMIC BRAKE BOOST PEDAL


(Refer to illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE", Item 32)
The left pedal controls the auxiliary/service brake and dynamic brake boost. These two
functions are integrated into the double-action pedal.
• When the pedal is depressed the first 10 degrees of pedal travel, it boosts the electrical
braking command. Dynamic brake boost is effective when the machine is traveling 3 to
4 mph. It is not effective when the machine is traveling at maximum ground speed.
• Depressing the pedal activates the disc brakes on all four wheels.
• The primary auxiliary/service brake function should be for EMERGENCY STOPS.
However, when required, the auxiliary/service brakes could be used to prevent
movement of the loader while in close proximity to a transport vehicle or to hold the
loader on a grade.

The auxiliary/service brake and dynamic brake boost pedal should NOT be
routinely used to stop the loader during normal operation. The loader
should be stopped by releasing the accelerator pedal and utilizing the
dynamic (regenerative) braking system. Use of the service brake to
routinely stop the loader during material handling operations will result in
accelerated wear of the disc pads and rotors.

AUXILIARY (EMERGENCY) STEERING SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)


The optional auxiliary steering system automatically activates if the hydraulic steering system
pressure drops below 30 psi. The engine select switch must be in the HI throttle position. The
auxiliary steering system employs the use of two 24 VDC, 9-horsepower motor-driven pumps
with the machine’s four batteries as the 24 VDC power source. The LINCS™ computer
system will activate the amber warning light, an audible alarm will sound, and a text message
indicating the activation of the auxiliary steering system will appear on the cab monitor.

Auxiliary steering is an emergency (back up) system. It should only be


used to transport the loader to the service area. It should NEVER be used
in material handling operations.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A019 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
POT FAIL/LOCKOUT ALARM & FIGURE 7 1_2
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
POT FAIL/LOCKOUT ALARM
Should the joysticks, accelerator pedal or dynamic brake boost pedal malfunction, the pot
fail/lockout alarm function will be actuated by the LINCS™ computer system. When the pot
fail/lockout alarm function is actuated, the amber warning light will illuminate, a notice screen
will appear on the computer screen indicating the nature of the problem, the audible alarm will
sound and that function will be disabled. The operator can silence the audible alarm and
remove the notice screen by touching any key on the computer keypad. However, the amber
light will continue to illuminate. The loader must be shut down and the problem corrected
before continuing operation.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A020 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OPERATOR’S SEAT 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


OPERATOR’S SEAT
The loader is equipped with a fully adjustable air-suspension operator’s seat. The joystick
controls for hoist and bucket control and steering are mounted on either side of the seat. The
operation of the joystick controls is provided in illustrations "LEFT-HAND JOYSTICK
CONTROL – DIRECTIONAL CONTROL" and "RIGHT-HAND JOYSTICK CONTROL – HOIST
AND BUCKET CONTROL".

Adjust the seat for proper access to all controls and fasten seat belts
before operating the machine.

AUTOMATIC AND MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENTS


(Refer to illustration "OPERATOR'S SEAT").
The operator’s seat has the following adjustments:
• AUTOMATIC HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT - The air suspension function has a travel range
of approximately 2” (51 mm). The seat adjusts automatically to the weight of the
operator.
• MANUAL HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT - The seat height can be manually adjusted by
operating the wide switch handle on the left side or front of the seat base (depending on
seat model). Pulling the handle upward raises the seat and pushing the handle
downward lowers the seat.
• HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT LOCK - A tear-shaped knob is located on the left side of the
seat base. Pulling the knob toward the front of the seat, to the locked position, locks
height adjustment. Pushing the knob backward unlocks height adjustment.
• SWIVEL ADJUSTMENT - The seat has a rotating base with a range of 270°. The
rotating base has possible stops every 90° with a pin lock brake system. The seat’s
rotating capability facilitates operators entering and exiting the seat. To rotate the seat,
push down on foot lever, located on the lower front of the seat base, and use your feet
and body weight to move the seat to the left or right 90°. Stop and release the lever to
lock the seat in place.
• CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTMENT - Infinite seat cushion angle adjustment from 5°-12°
can be made by turning the knob just under the front edge of the seat cushion.
• SEAT FORE AND AFT ADJUSTMENT - There are two control levers for fore and aft
adjustment. The levers are located on the right front side of the seat. One lever is just
below the seat cushion and the other is lower, on the seat base. Pulling up on the top
lever allows the operator to adjust the seat position fore and aft independent of the seat
base. Pulling up on the lower lever allows the operator to adjust the entire seat
mounting fore and aft.
• LUMBAR SUPPORT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT - Lumbar support height adjustment is
made by twisting the knob, located on the left side of the seat back to the desired
position.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A021 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OPERATOR’S SEAT 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

• HEADREST HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT - To adjust the headrest up or down, push or pull


the headrest to the desired position.
• BACKREST ANGLE ADJUSTMENT - Backrest adjustment is made by pushing the
lever, located on the left rear of the backrest and releasing it when the backrest is at the
desired position.
• ARMREST HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT - Armrest height adjustment is made by loosening
the knob on the side of the armrest, moving the armrest to the desired position and
retightening the knob.

TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR


The operator’s seat is supplied to LeTourneau, Inc. by an outside supplier. Service parts are
available through the PARTS CATALOG. The following instructions should aid in repairing
most common problems with your seat:
• The seat has a tilt-back base for repair access to the internal components of the air
suspension system (refer to illustration "OPERATOR’S SEAT").
• The seat cushions are replaceable. They can be removed and reinstalled by twisting the
locks as shown in illustration "OPERATOR’S SEAT".

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A021 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 8 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 003A022 (p)

Figure 8. OPERATOR’S SEAT

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A022 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA10352-8

FIGURE 8. OPERATOR'S SEAT


LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 003A022 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FLOOD AND TRAVEL LIGHTS & FIGURE 9 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


FLOOD AND TRAVEL LIGHTS
The loader is equipped with 110 VAC, 500-watt floodlights that are mounted on each side of
the cab on the rear view mirror support brackets, on poles on each side of the front frame, and
at each side of the rear of the machine, above the radiator. The floodlights are provided for
nighttime material handling operations. The travel lights are 24 VAC, 35-watt lights that are
mounted on the poles below the floodlights. The travel lights are protected by a metal guard.
The travel lights (illustration "FLOOD AND TRAVEL LIGHTS") are provided for moving the
machine from one location to another after dark. The switches for operating the lights are
located on the overhead rocker switch panel in the operator’s cab (refer to illustration
"OVERHEAD ROCKER SWITCH PANEL").

BE SURE the engine is not running and the electrical system is locked out
before servicing the flood and travel lights.

FRONT LIGHT LOCATIONS REAR LIGHT LOCATIONS


(MOUNTED EACH SIDE OF CAB)
Figure 9. FLOOD AND TRAVEL LIGHTS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A023 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LADDER, STAIRCASE & WORK AREA LIGHTING & FIGURE 10 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


LADDER, STAIRCASE AND WORK AREA LIGHTING
The loader is equipped with 24 VDC lights for illuminating the access ladder, staircase and
work service areas (refer to illustration "LADDER, STAIRCASE AND WORK AREA
LIGHTING"). The ladder and staircase lights are mounted on top of the tow unit and on top of
the operator’s cab. Two, 2-position, three-way switches are provided to turn the lights on and
off. The upper switch is mounted on the electrical control cabinet, behind the cab. The lower
switch is mounted beside a ground-level emergency shutdown switch and the lower ladder
switch, inside a protective metal frame, on the left rear of the tow unit. The switches are
labeled “LADDER LIGHT SWITCH”. The work area lights are mounted on each side of the
radiator, mid-engine, near the AC generator, and in the front frame. The work lights switch is
located on a switch box mounted at the pivot area on the left side of the machine. The key
switch does not have to be in the ON position to operate these lights.

LADDER AND STAIRCASE AREA LIGHTS


(MOUNTED ON TOP OF TOW UNIT AND ON TOP OF OPERATOR’S CAB – SIMILAR STYLE LIGHTS
MOUNTED IN WORK AREA)

UPPER LIGHT SWITCH LOWER LIGHT SWITCH


(MOUNTED ON ELECTRICAL CONTROL CABINET (MOUNTED IN PROTECTIVE FRAME – LEFT REAR
BEHIND CAB) OF TOW UNIT)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A025 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LADDER, STAIRCASE & WORK AREA LIGHTING & FIGURE 10 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

WORK LIGHTS SWITCH


(MOUNTED AT PIVOT AREA – LEFT SIDE OF MACHINE)
Figure 10. LADDER, STAIRCASE AND WORK AREA LIGHTING

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A025 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
POWERED ACCESS LADDER & FIGURE 11 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


POWERED ACCESS LADDER
The Model L-1350, L-1850 and L-2350 loaders are optionally equipped with a powered access
ladder mounted on the left rear of the tow unit (refer to illustration "POWERED ACCESS
LADDER").
Safe operation of the ladder depends on adherence to the safety warnings and cautions listed
herein and in the ladder manufacturer’s owner’s manual, available on the manufacturer’s
website. Periodic inspection and service must also be performed to the ladder to ensure safe
and trouble-free operation.

NORMAL OPERATION

Personal injury and damage to the ladder is possible if the ladder is not in
the full DOWN and LOCKED position before entering or exiting the
machine.

NEVER ride the ladder up or down. Serious personal injury and component
damage could result. Riding the ladder will void the manufacturer’s
warranty.

Major pinch points are identified by warning placards, however, other pinch
points exist. STAND CLEAR of all moving parts and travel of the ladder
when operating.

To avoid personal injury and component damage it is essential that all


personnel using the ladder be familiar with its operation and all indicators
and alarms as described herein.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A027 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
POWERED ACCESS LADDER & FIGURE 11 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


Two box-mounted three-position momentary toggle switches are provided to raise and lower
the ladder. A ground-level switch is mounted to the left of the ladder. The upper switch box is
mounted on the outside of the electrical control cabinet, behind the cab (refer to illustration
"LADDER SWITCHES").
To raise the ladder: Push either switch to the UP position and release it. The ladder will rise
and lock in the UP position. The switches have a green LED that flashes while the ladder is in
the UP cycle. Once the ladder is in the up and locked position the green LED will remain
illuminated without flashing. DO NOT attempt to operate the machine unless you are
certain the ladder is in the UP position.

(MOUNTED BEHIND OPERATOR’S CAB AND BOTTOM OF LADDER)


Figure 11. LADDER SWITCHES

To lower the ladder: Push either switch to the DOWN position and release it. The ladder will
lower and lock in the DOWN position. The machine’s park brake must be set before the
ladder will lower. The switches have a red LED that flashes while the ladder is in the DOWN
cycle. Once the ladder is in the down and locked position the red LED will remain illuminated
without flashing.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A027 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
POWERED ACCESS LADDER & FIGURE 11 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

If the park brake is released with the ladder in the DOWN position, an alarm
is posted on the operator interface screen. Tractive power is inhibited until
the operator raises the ladder to the full UP and LOCKED position.

The operator should NEVER leave the cab with the park brake
released! Leaving the cab without setting the Park Brake could
result in unplanned and uncontrolled movement of the machine. This
could cause loss of life, serious injury or property damage.

Alarms: Prior to ladder operation, the green or red LED (as applicable to the ladder’s position)
should be illuminated and NOT flashing. A flashing red, green, or orange LED, prior to ladder
operation, is an indication of a problem and the ladder should not be operated until it is
repaired. Problems occurring during ladder operation result in an audible alarm accompanied
by rapidly flashing, dim, or constantly on LEDs during the ladder’s up/down cycles.
Troubleshooting information for problems indicated by the various alarm codes is provided in
the manufacturer’s information.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A027 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 12 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

EXTENDED RETRACTED

EXTENDED RETRACTED
Figure 12. POWERED ACCESS LADDER – TWO MODEL OPTIONS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A028 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
POWERED ACCESS LADDER...CONT'D & FIGURES 13 & 14 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


EMERGENCY OPERATION
Should an emergency situation or mechanical problem occur, which results in loss of electrical
power to the ladder, the ladder can still be lowered.
Loss of power to the ladder is sensed by the ladder’s control system. When the up/down
switches on either box are moved to the DOWN position, the emergency down circuit is
actuated. A charged 24 VDC capacitor powers the ladder to the down and locked position.
The capacitor has power to lower the ladder only one time, it is recharged by reapplying power
to the ladder.
MANUAL RELEASE
The ladder can be manually raised or lowered by loosening the Allen-head screw on the
ladder’s control panel. Access the control panel is gained by raising the metal plate at the top
of the ladder (refer to illustration "LADDER MANUAL RELEASE").

(LOCATED ON LADDER CONTROL PANEL AT TOP OF LADDER)


Figure 13. LADDER MANUAL RELEASE

SERVICE
The following service intervals and procedures are recommendations based on normal usage
and conditions. To best prepare a time schedule for your application, monitor and record on a
daily and seasonal observation basis for modifications to these recommendations which may
be required.

Disconnect power from the ladder prior to performing any service


operations to the ladder, welding on the machine, or removal of any plugs
on the ladder’s PC board or harness system. Refer to illustration "LADDER
LOCKOUT SWITCH AND FLUID LEVEL SIGHT GLASS".
DAILY INSPECTIONS
a. Check for oil leaks.
b. Check for loose or damaged fasteners and parts. Pay particular attention to the bolts
that secure the ladder to the machine.
c. Listen for adverse noise conditions during operation.
d. Check for changes in appearance, such as improper alignment, that will affect operation
and stability of the ladder.
e. Check safety labels. Replace any that have become illegible, damaged, or removed.
Refer to the ladder manufacturer’s information to order replacement labels.
Replacement labels are not available through LeTourneau, Inc.
f. Check hydraulic fluid level. The hydraulic fluid level is checked by viewing the sight
glass on the ladder’s control box, located at the top of the ladder (refer to illustration
"LADDER LOCKOUT SWITCH AND FLUID LEVEL SIGHT GLASS"). Correct oil level is
approximately 20 mm below the filler opening. DO NOT overfill reservoir. Replenish

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A029 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
POWERED ACCESS LADDER...CONT'D & FIGURES 13 & 14 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


with IPSO 46-68 viscosity hydraulic oil.

Should ladder operation become inhibited in extremes of heat and cold, it


may be necessary to consult your lubricant supplier or a lubrication
engineer for a recommendation on hydraulic oil that suits the extreme
conditions.

(LOCATED ON CONTROL BOX AT TOP OF LADDER)


Figure 14. LADDER LOCKOUT SWITCH AND FLUID LEVEL SIGHT GLASS

g. The bearings are sealed and pre-greased. They do not need periodic lubrication but
should be checked for smooth operation and to ensure they are correctly locked onto
the shaft. DO NOT subject the bearings to any high-pressure washing. Water
penetration will destroy the bearings. If the bearings are washed with high-pressure
water, the bearings will require grease immediately after washing.
WEEKLY INSPECTIONS
a. Check condition of hydraulic hoses and fittings.
b. Check electrical wiring and switches.
ANNUAL SERVICE
a. Change hydraulic fluid.

After changing the hydraulic oil, the hydraulic function of the ladder should
be operated through its full range. This is to expel any air that is present,
which would otherwise destroy the seals in the hydraulic system.
CLEANING
a. Clean ladder as required to ensure safe entry and exit of the machine.

When washing the machine DO NOT aim high-pressure water at or near the
ladder’s control box or bearings.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A029 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS
The operator should be continually aware of the indicator lights, gauges, audible alarm and
computer screen text messages. He/she should also be alert to any unusual noises,
vibrations, smoke, fluid leaks or odors that might signal problems with the loader or become a
potential fire hazard. Prompt and correct action by the operator in the event of trouble is often
required to prevent costly repairs and downtime. It is also essential for the operator to
correctly operate the machine to prevent damage to various components. We especially draw
your attention to DRIVE MOTORS OPERATIONAL CONCERNS.
COMPUTER MONITOR AND PANEL
(Refer to illustration "CAB CONTROL CONSOLE")
The LeTourneau, Inc. on-board computer control system computer monitors various functions
of the loader for problems and provides diagnostic data for maintenance personnel. Three
lights -- red (8), amber (9) and blue (10) -- are provided to alert the operator of problems with
engine, electrical, hydraulic and electronic systems. An audible alarm accompanies the red
and amber lights.
The loader is equipped with either a Detroit Diesel or Cummins engine. The Detroit Diesel or
Cummins (as applicable) diagnostic and warning system is integrated into the overall machine
alarm and monitoring system functions. The red and amber lights will activate upon receiving
appropriate messages from the engine’s diagnostics. The computer screen will display the
particular text message “STOP ENGINE” or “CHECK ENGINE”.
• The red alarm light (8) indicates a serious problem that requires immediate
shutdown of the machine. Operation should not be resumed until the problem
has been corrected. An engine problem that causes the red warning light to
glow will result in the accelerator becoming inoperable and the machine
coming to a complete stop. A "STOP ENGINE" text message will appear on the
computer screen. The machine must be stopped and the engine must be shut
down immediately.
• The amber warning light (9) indicates that a problem may not require immediate
shutdown of the engine but MUST BE INVESTIGATED and addressed immediately.
In the event an engine related problem results in the amber light glowing, the check
engine message will appear on the computer screen. The engine should be operated
to transport the machine to the maintenance area for diagnosis of the problem only.
Additional text may be displayed on a notice screen (illustration "LINCS™
COMPUTER SCREENS", Item “C”) after all of the warning screens have been
acknowledged. This text will give the operator additional information about warning
screen(s) and may suggest appropriate action for correcting the problem.
• The blue PM alert light (10) indicates a problem which should be addressed at the
next scheduled service interval.
• An audible alarm is activated when the red or amber lights come on.
• When red or amber lights come on a text fault message will appear on the computer
screen to advise the operator of the nature of the fault which activated the light. The
operator can remove the text message from the screen and silence the audible alarm
by pressing any key on the computer keypad. The fault text message will leave the
screen but will remain in the system for access by repair technicians. The light will
continue to glow until the system is accessed by repair technicians, and the fault
cleared.
• The warning lights will glow when the key switch is turned to the ON position. Within
50 seconds of turning the key switch to the ON position, the lights should go out.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A031 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


DIESEL ENGINE OPERATIONAL CONCERNS
NORMAL ENGINE SHUTDOWN: It is critically important to allow the engine to run at the LO
throttle setting for five minutes before shutting down the engine. When a turbocharged engine
is stopped immediately, the turbochargers continue to turn without an oil supply to the
bearings. Allowing the engine to run at LO throttle for five minutes also cools the bearings and
seals in the turbochargers. If the engine is stopped suddenly, the turbocharger temperature
may rise as much as 100ºF (38ºC) over normal safe operating temperature. The results of the
extreme heat may be seized bearings or loose oil seals.
An automatic idle timer is programmed into the LINCS™ Computer System. When the key
switch is turned to the OFF position to stop the engine, the idle timer will be automatically
engaged if the engine has been run for three minutes or more. Any warning, alarm or notice
screens must be acknowledged by the operator before the idle timer will actuate. The engine
will continue to run at LO throttle for five minutes. The LINCS™ Computer System will remain
booted up. After five minutes, the engine will stop but the LINCS™ Computer System will
remain booted up for an additional 45 seconds. If the key switch is turned back to the ON
position during this 45-second interval, the LINCS™ Computer System will remain booted up
until the key switch is once again turned to the OFF position. The idle timer can be bypassed
and the engine stopped immediately by pressing “0” on the keypad. It is NOT recommended
to stop the engine immediately after it has been run at HI throttle as damage to the
turbochargers is possible.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A031 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS...CONT'D & FIGURE 15 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUTDOWN: Never use the emergency shutdown system except in
an emergency. Using the emergency shutdown system can cause serious damage to the
engine turbochargers. If the emergency shutdown system is activated, a qualified and
experienced technician should check the engine for damage to the turbochargers before the
loader is returned to service.
ENGINE MECHANICAL PROBLEMS: Should the red alarm light and audible alarm in
conjunction with a text fault message indicating overheating, low or no engine oil pressure
or excessive crankcase pressure come on, shut down the engine IMMEDIATELY. Running
the engine with any of these problems can quickly ruin the engine. Call for service and do not
operate the engine until the problem is corrected and the light remains off.

Do not remove radiator surge tank cap without first bleeding off the
pressure with the ball valve on top of the surge tank or serious burns could
result. Use extreme caution when working with a hot radiator. Refer to
illustration "RADIATOR SURGE TANK AIR RELEASE BALL VALVE".

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A032 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS...CONT'D & FIGURE 15 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

(LOCATED ON TOP OF TOW UNIT)


Figure 15. RADIATOR SURGE TANK AIR
RELEASE BALL VALVE

EMERGENCY JUMP STARTING: It is possible to damage the solid-state electronic controls of


the loader and engine if jumper cables are connected improperly or arcing occurs. The
possibility of serious personal injury is also possible. Therefore, LeTourneau, Inc.
recommends that the machine only be jump started with the optional jumpstart socket (refer to
illustration "OPTIONAL JUMPSTART SOCKET - TWO MODEL OPTIONS").

(LOCATED AT LEFT REAR OF TOW UNIT)


Figure 16. OPTIONAL JUMPSTART SOCKET – TWO MODEL OPTIONS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A032 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS...CONT'D & FIGURE 15 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


AVOID UNNECESSARY ENGINE IDLING: During long engine idling periods, the engine
coolant temperature will fall below the normal operating range. The incomplete combustion of
fuel in a cold engine will cause crankcase dilution; formation of lacquer or gummy deposits on
the valves, pistons and rings and rapid accumulation of sludge in the engine.
ENGINE PROBLEMS - EARLY WARNING SIGNS: Most engine problems give an early
warning. Look and listen for changes in performance, sound or engine appearance that can
indicate service or engine repair is needed. Some changes to look for are as follows:
• Engine misfires
• Unusual engine noises
• Excessive vibration
• Excessive smoke
• Fuel, oil or coolant leaks
• Sudden changes in engine operating temperature or pressure
• Loss of power
• An increase in the rate of fuel consumption
• An increase in the rate of oil consumption

To prevent damage to the DDEC electronic control system, disconnect the


following BEFORE welding: battery power and ground cables and the
power connector at the DDEC Electronic Control Module (ECM). Failure to
isolate the DDEC system from high current (possible occurrence as a result
of welding) can result in severe ECM damage.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A032 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS...CONT'D & FIGURE 16 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


HYDRAULIC SYSTEM MONITORING AND OPERATIONAL CONCERNS
If a warning light and its accompanying text message indicate a problem with the hydraulic
system, perform the following procedure:

Use extreme caution when removing any valves or hoses or attempting to


connect gauges to couplers. Hydraulic fluid under pressure can penetrate
the skin and cause serious injury, blindness or death. Wear work gloves
and keep your hand well away from any possible source of escaping fluid.
Wear safety goggles.

Before servicing or repairing anything pertaining to the hydraulic system,


the pressure should always be relieved from the hoist and bucket lines.
Relieve pressure by using the auxiliary pilot pump switch and the bucket
control switch (roller switch) or hoist joystick to relieve pressure in the
cylinders. The key switch must be in the ON position with the engine NOT
running. Refer to AUXILIARY PILOT PUMP SWITCH.

a. Stop the loader.


b. Lower the bucket to the ground.
c. Put the engine select switch in the LO position.
d. Set the park brake.
e. Immediately turn the key switch to the OFF position.

Normal shutdown procedures require that the engine be run in LO throttle


for five minutes or more. But in this case, an emergency, turn the key
switch to the OFF position immediately. This will help to prevent cavitation
of the hydraulic pumps.
f. Get out of the loader and check the hydraulic oil reservoir sight gauge.
1. If the hydraulic oil sight gauge shows that the quantity of hydraulic oil is at a safe
level, call for a maintenance check on the hydraulic oil cooling system.
2. If the hydraulic level is low and the reservoir must be filled, observe the following
warning.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A033 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS...CONT'D & FIGURE 16 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Always release air pressure in the hydraulic oil reservoir before servicing
or repairing anything requiring removal of the reservoir filler cap. Release
of the reservoir air pressure is done by turning the manual air release valve
to the OPEN position. The air pressure in the reservoir will be released,
and at the same time, the valve will lock in the air pressure in the rest of the
system. After servicing, repairing, or inspecting the hydraulic oil reservoir,
make certain to turn the manual air release valve (refer to illustration
"HYDRAULIC TANK AIR RELEASE VALVES") to the CLOSED position to
pressurize the reservoir.

Whenever there is a hydraulic leak (such as a leaking O-ring or hose)


release the air pressure from the hydraulic reservoir to prevent further loss
of hydraulic fluid.

When the emergency stop or fire suppression systems are actuated, the
automatic air release valve (refer to illustration "HYDRAULIC TANK AIR
RELEASE VALVES"), located on top of the hydraulic reservoir, will
automatically release air pressure from the hydraulic tank. Once tripped,
the valve must be manually reset by pushing the button IN to the closed
position.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AUXILIARY OIL COOLER (OPTIONAL)


An optional auxiliary oil cooler is mounted on the right rear side of the tow unit. The cooler’s
fan will automatically come on when the hydraulic oil temperature reaches 120ºF. The fan’s
speed can be forced too high when additional cooling is required to accommodate extremely
hot ambient temperatures. Fan speed is adjusted via the LINCS™ computer system.
Temporarily forcing fan speed too high can be useful in clearing the cooler coils of an
accumulation of dust and dirt. Refer to AUXILIARY OIL COOLER for additional information on
the hydraulic system auxiliary oil cooler.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A033 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS...CONT'D & FIGURE 17 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


DRIVE MOTOR OPERATIONAL CONCERNS
Some components of the drive motors and converters are recorded by the machine monitoring
system. Signals relating to motor current, voltage, temperature and other parameters will give
an indication of system “health”. The appropriate light (red, amber or blue) along with the
computer text message should be heeded.

OVERSPEED PREVENTION
Operation of the loader should be monitored to ensure that overspeeds do not occur.
Overspeeds can cause commutator bar displacement on the commutator, which leads to
excessive brush wear and flashing with potential serious damage to the motor. Excessive
overspeed can cause coil movement and/or banding failure of the armatures.

Overspeed Prevention Recommendations:


a. Observe actual grade conditions as compared to the braking specification plate for both
loaded and unloaded conditions. The braking specification plate is located on the inside
cab wall (refer to illustration "TYPICAL TRAVEL SPEEDS CAUTION SIGN").
b. Reduce speed PRIOR to descending a grade.
c. As a general rule, descend a grade no faster than what the loader will ascend the same
grade with the same load.
d. Promptly apply service brakes to slow the loader if an overspeed situation occurs.
e. Reduce speeds if operating on three motors. Never operate the loader on a grade with
less than three motors.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A034 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS...CONT'D & FIGURE 17 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STALL BURN PREVENTION
Stall burning must be avoided. Stall burning may occur when the operator stalls the loader in a
poorly blasted bank while maintaining a depressed accelerator. Stall burning may also occur
while holding the loader stationary on an ascending grade for a period of time by depressing
the accelerator.

Due to variations in drive components, this


may or may not be the correct travel speeds
caution sign for your machine. Refer to the
travel speeds caution sign mounted in the
operator’s cab for accurate information.
(LOCATED LEFT SIDE WALL OF OPERATOR’S CAB)
Figure 17. TYPICAL TRAVEL SPEEDS
CAUTION SIGN

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A034 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


WALK-AROUND INSPECTION
It is essential for the operator to perform a walk-around inspection of the loader daily or pre-
shift before operating the machine in material handling operations. Anyone performing
inspections or service to the machine should read and understand the instructions in this
SERVICE MANUAL and the engine manufacturer’s owner’s manual (available on engine
manufacturer's website) before attempting to inspect or service the loader.
Guidelines for performing the walk-around inspection are provided in the MODULAR
PREVENTIVE AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES. The OPERATOR’S DAILY OR PRE-
SHIFT WALK-AROUND section of the schedules should be printed from the electronic manual
for use in the inspection of the loader. All scheduled lubrication and cleaning should be
incorporated into the walk-around inspection.

Service personnel should pay special attention to SAFETY IN


MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS and SERVICE SWITCHES AND SERVICE
CONNECTIONS. All instructions provided in these articles should be
followed, as applicable.

DYNAMIC BRAKING
The service brakes and parking brakes are back up systems for the dynamic or retard braking
system, which is the loader’s primary braking system. When the service brake pedal is pressed
the first 10 degrees of pedal travel, it boosts the dynamic or retard braking system.
Depressing the pedal further activates the air-release service brakes.
The primary function of the service brakes is to hold the machine while on grades or when in
close proximity to material hauling vehicles or for emergency stops. The service brakes are
NOT intended to routinely stop the loader during material handling operations. Use of the
service brakes to routinely stop the loader during material handling operations will result in
rapid wear of the disc pads and rotors.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A035 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

It is natural for operators to equate stopping the loader with stopping a


highway vehicle, which requires depressing the brake pedal to stop.
Therefore, it is essential to train operators in the function and capability of
the loader’s dynamic braking system to avoid accelerated wear of the disc
pads and rotors.

The function of the parking brake is to hold the loader while parked. The parking brake is
applied with the console-mounted switch. When the park brake is set the drive system is
inhibited.

The operator should never leave the cab with the parking brake
released. Leaving the cab without setting the Park Brake could result
in unplanned and uncontrolled movement of the machine. This could
cause loss of life, serious injury or property damage.

BUCKET ROLLBACK STOPS AND BELLCRANK STOPS


It is essential that the operator visually inspect the bucket rollback stops and bellcrank stops as
part of the daily walk-around inspection. If the stops are damaged, missing or excessively
worn, they must be replaced immediately or damage to the lift arms and other components
could occur (refer to illustration "BUCKET ROLLBACK AND BELLCRANK STOP BLOCK
INSPECTION" and bucket rollback and bellcrank stops replacement procedures).

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A035 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 18 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


REFER TO TA-9346 FOR THIS
ILLUSTRATION
1. SHIM
2. SHIM
3. STOP BLOCK
4. LOCKWASHER
5. CAPSCREW
Figure 18. BUCKET ROLLBACK AND
BELLCRANK STOP BLOCK INSPECTION

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A036 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA9346

1 2 3 4 5

TA-9346
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 003A036 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NON-MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


BASIC MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NON-
MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS
The following instructions are for the basic operations of the controls and engine start up and
shut down (non-material handling operation). It is ESSENTIAL for operators of the loader to
read and understand all instructions contained in this SERVICE MANUAL pertaining to
machine operation and safety before operating the loader. We especially draw the reader’s
attention to SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS. The engine manufacturer’s owner’s manual(s)
(available on the manufacturer’s website) should also be reviewed for any special instructions
pertaining to operation and maintenance of the engine. These instructions cover various
options that may or may not be found on your machine.
If there are ANY questions after reading the instructions contained in this SERVICE
MANUAL and the engine manufacturer’s owners manual(s), call a LeTourneau, Inc.
distributor or the engine manufacturer’s local authorized service center to have the
problems resolved BEFORE operating the loader.

Use of the loader in material handling operations is covered in BASIC


MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS - MATERIAL HANDLING
OPERATIONS.

PRE-STARTING PROCEDURES
Perform the following procedures before starting the engine (refer to illustration "CAB
CONTROL CONSOLE"):

If the machine will be moved following starting the engine, BE SURE the
frame lock has been removed and secured before starting the engine.
Moving the loader with the frame lock in the locked position could cause
serious machine damage.

a. Retract the powered rear access ladder to the full up and locked position.
b. Adjust the operator’s seat to a comfortable position to safely operate the controls. Make
sure that the seat is adjusted so that your right foot reaches the accelerator, whereby
you can FULLY RELEASE the pedal as well as press the pedal down.
c. Fasten seat belts.
d. Enter four-digit access code into computer (optional). The engine will start without the
code being entered but machine propulsion is inhibited until this requirement is met.
e. Place the directional switch in the neutral (center) position. The switch must be in the
neutral position to start the engine.
f. Check that the park brake is in the park (pulled out) position.
g. Place the engine select switch in the LOW position.
h. Turn the key switch to the ON position. The system initialization screen will appear on
the computer monitor followed by the production data screen. If no faults are present
which would inhibit the start function, the engine is ready to be started. If a problem

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A037 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NON-MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


exists which will inhibit the start function, a notice screen will appear along with a text
message indicating the nature of the problem. Correct the problem and acknowledge
the notice screen by touching any key on the computer keyboard.

With the key switch turned to the ON position, the red, amber and blue
should glow. Within 50 seconds of turning the key switch to the ON
position, the warning lights should go out.

STARTING THE ENGINE


After the above measures are taken, the engine is ready to start.

ALWAYS sound the horn for 2-3 seconds prior to starting the engine to
alert personnel on the machine or in close proximity to it that the engine is
about to start. Allow at least 30 seconds for them to clear the area before
starting the engine. Check wing mirrors and all sides of machine from your
seat. If the horn is inoperable (see the following NOTE), dismount the
loader and walk around it to be sure no one is on the machine or in close
proximity to it before starting the engine.

Compressed air system pressure powers the horn and the park brake (L-
1350-L-1850). Air pressure may, on occasion, bleed off after the loader has
been parked overnight. This will result in the horn being inoperable until
the engine is started, which provides compressed air system pressure.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A037 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OP INST. NON-MAT'L...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STARTING DETROIT DIESEL EQUIPPED MACHINES
Turn the key switch firmly to the START position. If the engine fails to start within 30 seconds,
release the key switch and allow the starting motor to cool at least two minutes before trying to
start again. If the engine fails to start after four attempts, an inspection should be made to
determine the cause. Refer to CAUTIONS below.

STARTING CUMMINS ENGINE-EQUIPPED MACHINES:

Cummins engines utilize a pre-lube system, which builds up the engine oil
pressure prior to starting the engine. The key switch must be held in the
START position while the pre-lube system is in operation. Cummins
engines WILL NOT start immediately when the key switch is turned to the
START position.
Turn the key switch firmly to the START position. This will energize the pre-lube timer solenoid
that supplies 24 VDC to the lower starter motor. This supply rotates the starter motor without
engaging the Bendix. When the oil pressure reaches 4 psi, the pre-lube timer solenoid turns
off the pre-lube starter motor and after a three-second delay, will allow the normal start circuit
to function.
If the engine fails to start within 30 seconds, release the key switch and allow the starting
motor to cool at least two minutes before trying to start again. If the engine fails to start after
four attempts, an inspection should be made to determine the cause. If equipped with ether
start, the button may be depressed to inject ether, but only while starting.

To prevent serious damage to the starter, if the engine does not start, DO
NOT turn the key switch to the START position again while the starter
motor is still running.

Observe the oil pressure gauge immediately after starting the engine. If
there is no oil pressure indicated within 10 to 15 seconds, stop the engine
and check the lubricating system.
AFTER STARTING THE ENGINE:
a. Run the engine at the LO throttle position with no load for approximately five minutes,
allowing it to warm up before applying a load.

During cold weather starts, the engine should be warmed up at least 10


minutes or until the engine temperature gauge indicates at least +120ºF
(49ºC). Normal operating engine coolant temperature is +160ºF to +190ºF
(71ºC to 88ºC).
b. Check all instruments and indicator lights. For operation of the motor and loader, the
following must be true:

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A038 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OP INST. NON-MAT'L...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


1. All warning lights should be off.
2. The water temperature gauge should read at least +120ºF (49ºC).
3. The oil pressure gauge should read at least 15 psi.
4. The air pressure gauge should read at least 80 psi.
c. Move the engine select switch to the HI position and recheck instruments and indicator
lights.

During cold weather it may take more than 30 minutes operation for the
hydraulic oil to reach its normal operating temperature of 140ºF to 160ºF
(60ºC to 71ºC).

OPERATING THE LOADER (NON-MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS)


After the starting procedures and observations above have been made, and it is determined
the loader is safe to operate, it can be moved.

The following instructions cover the basics of only moving and shutting
down the loader. Use of the loader in material handling operations is
covered in detail in BASIC MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS.
a. Pull the hoist control joystick back to raise the bucket off the ground.
b. When the bucket rises to about three (3) feet high, return the hoist control joystick back
to the center position to stop movement of the lift arms.
c. Use the bucket control switch (roller switch) on the hoist joystick or pull the hoist joystick
to the left to roll back the bucket. Release the bucket control switch (roller switch) or
move the joystick back to center when the bucket reaches the full rollback position.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A038 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OP INST. NON-MAT'L...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


It is recommended that the bucket be three to four feet off the ground and
rolled back when the machine is traveling. Bucket angle can be verified by
checking the bucket angle gauge on the production data screen, on the
computer monitor (refer to illustration "LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREENS").
d. Release the parking brake by pushing the parking brake control IN.

The park brake cannot be released until compressed air system pressure
has reached 80 psi on the air pressure gauge and the powered rear access
ladder has been retracted to the full up and locked position.
e. Move the directional control switch (refer to illustration "JOYSTICK OPERATION") to the
desired position.
f. SLOWLY press the accelerator and steer the loader slightly left and right to make sure
the steering system is operating normally.

The speed of the loader is proportional to the amount the accelerator is


depressed.
g. Immediately after traveling 10 to 15 feet, release the accelerator pedal to determine that
dynamic braking is occurring. The loader should come to a complete stop on level
ground.
h. Test the auxiliary/service and dynamic brake boost pedal. Press the accelerator to
operate the machine to approximately 5 mph. Slowly release the accelerator. Press the
brake pedal with your left foot and note the increased braking effort. After the machine
comes to a stop, it may rock back and forth while the brake pedal is being held down.
The back and forth movement is normal (if it occurs).

Always depress and release the accelerator pedal slowly and smoothly.
Abrupt movement of the accelerator pedal will result in a sudden response
from the loader’s drive motors. Sudden and complete release of the
accelerator pedal will apply full dynamic braking. When the loader is on a
grade, it will not come to a full stop until the brake pedal is applied.

The auxiliary/service brake and dynamic brake boost pedal should NOT
routinely be used to stop the loader during normal operation. The loader
should be stopped by releasing the accelerator pedal and utilizing the
dynamic (regenerative) braking system. Use of the service brakes to
routinely stop the loader during material handling operations will result in
accelerated wear of the disc pads and rotors.
However, when required, auxiliary/service brakes could be used to prevent
movement of the loader while in close proximity to a transport vehicle or to
hold the loader on a grade.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A039 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OP INST. NON-MAT'L...CONT'D 1_2

Training only!
CHANGING Always use your
DIRECTIONS machine original
(FORWARD AND documentation!
REVERSE)
The machine’s direction, FORWARD or REVERSE, can be selected without releasing the
accelerator. Once the directional control switch is moved to the opposite direction, the
machine’s control system automatically applies dynamic braking, slows the loader to a
complete stop and then changes the machine’s direction. While this change of direction is
being processed by the control system, the accelerator pedal can remain fully depressed. This
will ensure cycle times are maximized and there is no wasted time selecting direction.
NORMAL SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES
After operation of the loader, or if the loader will be left unattended, the following procedures
should be followed for normal shutdown:
a. Move the loader to the desired location.
b. Position the level bucket on the ground by pressing the float control button.
c. Pull the parking brake control to the out position to engage the parking brake.
d. Move the directional control switch to the neutral (center) position.
e. Place the engine select switch in the LO position.
f. Turn the key switch to the OFF position. Turn the key switch to the OFF position
activates the idle timer if the engine has been run for three minutes or more. Any
warning, alarm or notice screens must be acknowledged by the operator before the idle
timer will actuate. The idle timer will allow the engine to run at LO throttle for five
minutes to cool the turbochargers. The LINCS™ Computer System will remain booted
up. When the idle timer is activated, the computer monitor will provide a screen
indicating that the idle timer is operating. After five minutes, the engine fuel flow to the
injectors will be stopped, which will stop the engine. The LINCS™ Computer System will
remain booted up for an additional 45 seconds. During this 45-second interval, the key
switch can be switched back to the ON position and the LINCS™ Computer System will
remain booted up. This function saves waiting the normal two minutes boot-up time to
complete service work, data transmission, etc. If the key switch is not switched back to
the ON position during the 45-second interval, the LINCS™ Computer System will switch
off and power to the instrument panel is cut. If the key switch is turned back to the ON
position to keep the LINCS™ Computer System booted up, turning it back to the OFF
position will immediately cut power to the LINCS™ Computer System and instrument
panel.

The idle timer can be bypassed by pressing “0” on the computer keypad.
This will shut down the engine and LINCS™ Computer System and cut
power to the instrument panel immediately. Bypassing the idle timer can
cause damage to the turbochargers. Shutting the engine down
immediately should only be done in emergency situations.
g. After the engine is stopped, turn the key switch to the ON position, allow LINCS™ to
boot up, manually activate the auxiliary pilot pump switch and move the hoist joystick
back and forth and side to side to neutralize the pressure in the cylinders.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A039 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OP INST. NON-MAT'L...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


With the diesel engine not running, the only way to create pilot pressure is
by holding the auxiliary pilot pump switch in the ON position. This will
activate an electric motor that rotates a hydraulic pump. The flow
produced by this pump is directed into the normal pilot circuit. Pressure in
this circuit is limited to 600 psi. Without this auxiliary pilot circuit there
would be no way to lower lift arms or release trapped pressure from the
hoist and bucket cylinders.
EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN
The operator’s cab is equipped with an emergency stop button for use in emergency
situations. Emergency shutdown switches are also located at ground level on each side of the
loader. These switches should NEVER be used for routine shutdown of the engine as damage
to components could occur. They should only be used in emergency situations. Following
their use, a complete inspection of the engine must be made by a qualified technician to
ensure no damage has occurred. When the emergency shut down system is actuated, air
pressure in the hydraulic reservoir is automatically released by the automatic air release valve,
located on top of the hydraulic reservoir. This valve must be manually reset by pushing the
button on the switch IN to the closed position. Refer to MECHANICAL OPERATING
CONCERNS for additional information.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A039 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


BASIC MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS MATERIAL
HANDLING OPERATIONS
GENERAL MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS AND PRECAUTIONS
The following instructions are for operating the loader in basic material handling operations.
These instructions are provided as a guide to safe and productive operations. Operating the
loader under different job situations may require additional measures than are described
herein.
Before the loader is used in material handling operations, the operator(s) should have a
good understanding and demonstrated ability of the following:
a. All controls, warning and indicator lights, gauges, computer screen and keypad and any
special instructions concerning engine start-up, operation and shutdown as provided in
this SERVICE MANUAL and the engine manufacturer’s owners manual.
b. Basic operation of the loader with regards to maneuvering, traveling, starting and
stopping, changing directions (forward/reverse) and hoist and bucket functions as
described in BASIC MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS – NON-MATERIAL
HANDLING OPERATIONS.
c. Operation of the loader to ensure mechanical components are operated and monitored
in a manner that will provide safe and cost effective material handling operations as
described in MECHANICAL OPERATING CONCERNS.
d. The safety instructions contained within this SERVICE MANUAL and knowledge of
company safety policy in regards to operating the loader in material handling operations.
e. Knowledge of the job site and terrain to ensure safe machine operation to avoid damage
to the loader or vehicles being loaded.
It is ESSENTIAL to observe the following operating practices and precautions to prevent
damage to the loader and vehicles being loaded:
• Know the material to be loaded. Overloading the bucket can damage the lift arms,
mainframe and hydraulic equipment.
• NEVER try to raise an overloaded bucket to additional height by bouncing it.
• NEVER let any part of the loader touch any part of the truck or hopper being loaded.
• NEVER use the loader as a dozer; it is not designed as a dozer.
• NEVER jack the loader up by using the bucket and lift arms.
• When traveling pit-to-pit, shop-to-pit, pit-to-shop, etc., the loader bucket should be
carried three (3) to four (4) feet off the ground in a full rollback position.

Do not corner load the bucket. Damage to the lift arms could occur. In all
bucket-loading cycles, approach the face or stockpile with the bucket
square and the loader straight (not articulated). The bucket should always
be loaded close to the ground.

As the loader bucket enters or exits the pile, do not spin or bounce the
tires. Spinning the tires could cause serious damage to the drivers and
traction motors.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A041 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NEVER enter the pile at full speed. This can cause serious damage to the
traction motors, drivers, lift arms and bucket.
LOADING THE BUCKET
Loading the Bucket with Coal or Overburden
Perform the following procedures to load the bucket with coal or overburden:
a. Approach the material at three (3) or four (4) MPH with the bucket level and
approximately one inch (1”) from the ground.
b. As the bucket teeth enter the material, use either the hoist joystick or the hoist button to
start lifting.
c. As the bucket is lifting, slowly crowd the bucket back using either the joystick or the roller
potentiometer.
d. Continue to keep driving slowly into the material while hoisting and slowly crowding the
bucket until it is fully rolled back.

While filling the bucket, be sure not to stall the bucket, hoist or the
forward movement of the loader for a smoother operation and faster
bucket fill.
e. Select REVERSE. The bucket will continue to rise as the machine is backed and turned
with the hoist joystick control pulled back or if the hoist control button was pressed.
f. Select FORWARD. The movement of the lift arms will automatically stop when the
maximum height limit is reached.
g. The machine is now ready to approach the truck or hopper for loading.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A041 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OP INST. MAT'L HANDLING...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


Loading the Bucket with Shot Rock
Perform the following procedures to load the bucket with shot rock:
a. Approach the material at one (1) or two (2) MPH with the bucket level and approximately
one inch (1”) from the ground.
b. As the bucket teeth enter the material, use either the hoist joystick or the hoist button to
start lifting.
c. As the bucket is lifting, slowly crowd the bucket back, using either the joystick or the
roller potentiometer.
d. Continue to keep driving slowing into the material while hoisting and slowly crowding the
bucket until it is fully rolled back.

While filling the bucket, be sure not to stall the bucket, hoist or the
forward movement of the loader for a smoother operation and faster
bucket fill.
e. Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
f. Use either the bucket control roller potentiometer or hoist joystick for two seconds to roll
back the bucket and release it. Pull back on the hoist joystick control. Should the hoist
stop, let up slightly on the accelerator.

Once the machine has entered the material, do not attempt to roll the
bucket forward.

g. Continue loading the bucket in two-second rollback intervals until the bucket is loaded.
h. Select REVERSE. Complete the rollback of the bucket while reversing and release the
bucket control roller potentiometer or return the hoist joystick to center. The bucket will
continue to rise as the machine is backed while the hoist joystick is pulled back.
i. Select FORWARD.
j. The machine is now ready to approach the truck or hopper for loading.

The bucket section of the hydraulic system has priority over the hoist
section (i.e., with the hoist joystick control pulled back, the hoist will stop
or slow noticeably when the bucket control switch is used.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A042 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OP INST. MAT'L HANDLING...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

The bucket for the loaders is rated as follows:


L-1350 − 80,000 lbs. (36,287 kgs.)

L-1850 − 100,000 lbs. (45,359 kgs.)

L-2350 − 160,000 lbs. (72,574 kgs.)
These ratings are based on SAE J742 standards, which do not use loading
material onto the spillguard for the rated capacity calculations. DO NOT
load material onto the spillguard as the bucket will be overloaded and this
could damage the loader and result in injury to the operator. The bucket
should be loaded only to the bottom of the spillguard (refer to illustration
"BUCKET LOADING").

Bucket Overload Situations


The operator should watch the hoisting of the day’s first bucket load as he/she approaches the
truck to be loaded. If the bucket stops before it reaches the NORMAL top (refer to illustration
"HOISTING THE LOAD") or stops before rising past the required dump height of the sides of
the truck, the bucket is overloaded. Overloading is harmful to the loader.

If the bucket is loaded to 120% of rated capacity hoisting action is


inhibited, the amber light will illuminate, the audible alarm will sound and
the text screen indicating bucket overload will appear on the computer
monitor. The audible alarm can be silenced and the text message removed
from the screen by touching any key on the keypad. However, the amber
light will continue to illuminate.

If overloading occurs and the bucket stops, the operator must quickly push the hoist joystick
forward to lower the lift arms and use the bucket control switch or move the hoist joystick to the
right to dump the bucket.
On the next cycle, the operator must not load as much material into the bucket as was in the
previous load. If this loaded bucket goes to the NORMAL top without stopping, it is not
overloaded. Properly loaded buckets (not overloaded) reflect good work practice by the
operator and results in reliable machine performance.
The amount of material in the bucket can be monitored by checking the production data screen
on the computer monitor (refer to illustration "LINCS™ COMPUTER SCREENS", Item “B”).

Should an overload cause the machine to tip forward while hoisting or


transporting a load, DO NOT PANIC! Lower the bucket to the ground and
the machine will stabilize.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A042 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OP INST. MAT'L HANDLING...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


HOISTING THE LOAD
The following procedure should be followed when hoisting a load:
a. The bucket height switch (CAB CONTROL CONSOLE, Item 15) should be in the down
position or up position as the operation requires. Refer to BUCKET HEIGHT SWITCH
for a detailed description of this switch.
b. Pull the hoist joystick control back or press the hoist control switch to hoist the bucket.
Hoisting action stops when the bucket reaches the height at which the adjustable limit
switches are set.
c. If it becomes necessary to lift the bucket higher than the height at which the limit switch
is set, turn off the bucket height switch (CAB CONTROL CONSOLE, Item 15) and
continue to lift the bucket with the hoist joystick control.

Figure 19. BUCKET LOADING

After the operator dumps the bucket load with the bucket height switch in the OFF
position, the operator never has to re-level the bucket as it is automatically leveled.

DUMPING THE LOAD


The following procedure should be followed when dumping a load:
a. When loading vehicles of uniform height, the bucket height should be adjusted to stop
the bucket at the same height on each lift. The bucket height should be in the ON
position. When the loader is in this configuration, the operator will not have to manually
position the height of the bucket with the hoist joystick control during each lift.

With the bucket height in the ON position, the operator never has to stop the
bucket as it is hoisted up. The bucket will automatically stop in the same place
every time.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A043 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BASIC MACHINE OP INST. MAT'L HANDLING...CONT'D 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


b. Position the loader bucket over the truck or hopper.
c. Use either the bucket control roller potentiometer or the hoist joystick to slowly dump the
load.

Speed of bucket movement is proportional to how far the bucket control roller
potentiometer or hoist joystick is moved from center. To prevent damage to the
loader and the truck, do not drop the load suddenly.

On high-sided trucks or railroad hoppers, it will be necessary to roll back the


bucket sufficiently for the bucket to clear the side of the truck or hopper before
moving the loader backward.

d. After the load is dumped, back the loader away from the truck or hopper.

LOWERING THE BUCKET


The auto-leveling circuit monitors bucket position and automatically levels the bucket from any
height dump position. After dumping the bucket, press the float control switch while the bucket
is suspended in the air. This will cause the bucket to descend to the ground. The bucket will
not free fall under this condition but will descend as rapidly as fluid being expelled from the lift
cylinders will allow.

The float control switch is inoperative when the bucket is loaded. To lower a
loaded bucket, push the hoist control joystick forward (power down).

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A043 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
DOs and DON’Ts 1_2

Training only! Always use yourDOS and


machine DON’TS
original documentation!
This section contains some specific DOs and DON’Ts that apply to the operation of the loader.
Compliance with the DOs and DON’Ts will be conducive to a longer operating life of the
loader. Non-compliance could cause damage to the loader and also endanger the operator.
These DOs and DON’Ts do not cover all possibilities but include those rules that are most
frequently overlooked or violated.

DOS
DO - walk completely around the loader, making sure everything is clear, before starting to
work.
DO - warm up engine with engine select switch in the LO position until the water temperature
gauge indicates that the engine coolant is at least +120ºF (49ºC) before moving the engine
select switch to HI position. This will increase engine life (refer to engine manual).
DO - move the engine select switch to the LO position, and let the engine run for several
minutes before shutting down. This will equalize engine temperature and increase engine life
(refer to engine manual).
DO - depress accelerator pedal slowly and smoothly to increase traction and travel speed.
Release accelerator pedal slowly and smoothly to stop wheel spin, reduce traction, or stop the
loader. Quick release will apply full braking.
DO - enter pile slowly with accelerator pedal almost completely released. Push down on pedal
a little at a time to maintain proper penetration into pile.
DO - use joystick controls slowly and smoothly to actuate bucket and hoist.
DO - release accelerator when digging in pile and hoist does not rise. Failure to rise indicates
you have applied too much traction.
DO - move steering joystick smoothly to turn. Jerking the joystick will cause the loader to jerk
and spill its load.
DO - report any deficiencies or malfunctions to your foreman.
DO - watch out for other personnel and vehicles in the area.
DO - replace broken or lost bucket teeth immediately to prevent ruining the adapters.
DO - fill the fuel tank at the end of each shift. This will prevent condensation from
contaminating the fuel. An adequate fuel supply will prevent possible engine damage caused
by erratic engine rpm when running low on fuel.
DO - operate the loader from the operator’s seat only.
DO - wear seat belt.
DO - avoid sudden stops with a load.
DO - have defects repaired immediately.
DO - make sure mirrors are properly adjusted and clean.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A045 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
DOs and DON’Ts 1_2

Training only! Always use your machineDON’TS


original documentation!
DON’T - use service brakes when changing direction or for normal stopping. All normal braking
must be done by releasing the accelerator pedal and using the dynamic brake boost, if
necessary. The service brake may be used to hold the loader stationary, after stopping with
the accelerator. Only in emergency should the service brakes be used to stop the loader.
DON’T - ram into pile. Ramming causes unnecessary shock to machine structures.
DON’T - use the bucket control switch from ROLLBACK to DUMP in an attempt to load the
bucket. This accomplishes very little except unnecessary wear and tear.
DON’T - hit truck hubs with the tires or truck beds with the lift arms or bucket.
DON’T - store fuel in a galvanized tank. Fuel oil reacts with the zinc coating to form powdery
flakes, which quickly clog fuel filters and strainers and damage fuel filters, strainers, fuel
pumps and injectors.
DON’T - lift front wheels off the ground when lowering the bucket for parking. The parking
brake locks wheels.
DON’T - operate the loader if the red alarm light comes on.
DON’T - allow riders while operating the loader.
DON’T - attempt to lift or transport loads in excess of rated capacity (see GENERAL
INFORMATION for information on capacity).
DON’T - walk, stand, or work under an elevated load or empty bucket.
DON’T - ever leave the loader with the engine running. Follow complete machine shutdown
procedures before leaving the cab.
DON’T - leave the loader with the bucket elevated.
DON’T - transport a load with the bucket in a position that obstructs the operator’s vision.
DON’T - operate the loader within 10 feet of live power lines.
DON’T - service the fuel tank while the engine is hot or running.
DON’T - smoke while servicing the fuel tank.
DON’T - remove the hydraulic tank cap without first bleeding the air pressure from the tank.
DON’T - jack the machine up with the bucket and lift arms.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 003A045 ( d 2 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SECTION 4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
REQUIREMENTS AND
RECOMMENDATIONS
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS & RECOMMENDATIONS

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
REQUIREMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
LETOURNEAU, INC.
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER
OSL-4

TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION
BREAK-IN PERIOD
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SERVICE REQUIREMENTS AND OPERATIONAL CONCERNS
COMPONENT HEATERS (Optional)
DRIVER MAINTENANCE AND ROTATION MODELS 51B AND 57
CLEANING AND COMPONENT INSPECTION
DC MOTOR OPERATION AND SERVICE LETOURNEAU PUBLICATION “TAKING
CARE OF YOUR DC MOTOR” (APPLICABLE TO MACHINES WITH M40/J2 TRACTION
MOTORS ONLY)
24 VOLT DC SYSTEM
MODULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES (POST BREAK-IN PERIOD)

SCOPE OF THIS PUBLICATION


PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS is provided to
assist the owner and equipment manager with general and specific recommendations for basic
preventive maintenance of the loader. The loader’s massive size and various systems require
a thorough knowledge of varied and complex maintenance and safety procedures contained
herein. Only trained and experienced personnel should be allowed to inspect and service the
machine. This publication is divided into ten parts for easy reference:
• GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION provides instructions for locating service switches
and connections, jacking instructions and other instructions relating to field service.
• BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURE provides important instructions for service
that must be performed from the initial commissioning of the machine to 1000 hours of
service. A BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURE CHECKLIST is provided. Print
the checklist from the electronic manual for use during the important break-in period.
• LUBRICATION AND SERVICE provides instructions on recommended lubricants and
fluids, the automatic lubrication system, and for establishing an on-going lubricating oil
analysis program.
• HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SERVICE REQUIREMENTS AND OPERATIONAL CONCERNS
provides instructions on servicing the hydraulic system and hydraulic pump gearbox.
• COMPONENT HEATERS provides instructions on the machine’s component heaters.
• DRIVER MAINTENANCE AND ROTATION MODELS 51B AND 57 provides instructions
on the lubrication, filtration system service requirements and rotation of the 51B and 57
drivers.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004A001 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS & RECOMMENDATIONS

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


• CLEANING AND COMPONENT INSPECTION provides instructions on cleaning
machine and making important structural inspections.
• TRACTION MOTOR OPERATION AND SERVICE provides instructions for the proper
operation and maintenance of the machine’s DC traction motors (applicable to machines
equipped with M40 or J2 traction motors only).
• 24 VOLT DC SYSTEM provides instructions on maintaining the loader's batteries and
battery charging alternator.
• MODULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES (POST BREAK-IN PERIOD)
provides instructions for service intervals for the various systems on the loader. Print the
schedules from the electronic manual for use in machine maintenance.

Instructions for maintaining other components and systems of the loader,


such as the tires, ball joints, cooling system, fuel system, compressed air
system, brakes and the central air blower system are provided in the
remaining publications within this SERVICE MANUAL.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004A001 ( d 2 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SECTION 4, PART 1
GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION
LETOURNEAU, INC.
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER
OSL- 4 PART 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
ESTABLISHING A COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
FOUR IMPORTANT REQUIREMENTS FOR AN EFFECTIVE PM PROGRAM
MODULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES FOR LOADERS
DATA DOWNLOADS
SERVICE SWITCHES AND CONNECTIONS
BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH
JUMP START SOCKET (Optional)
COMPONENT HEATER CONNECTIONS (Optional)
CENTRAL SERVICE SYSTEM (Optional)
SERVICE SWITCHES
STANDBY POWER MODE (OPTIONAL)
STANDBY POWER MODE SETUP PROCEDURE (USING THE LOADER AS AN
AUXILIARY POWER SOURCE)
RESORTING THE LOADER (AFTER USE AS AN AUXILIARY POWER SOURCE)
LOADER JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
RETRIEVING AND TOWING

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 1. BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH
Figure 2. OPTIONAL JUMP START SOCKET – 2 MODEL OPTIONS
Figure 3. COMPONENT HEATER AND ENGINE OIL/COOLANT PREHEATER
CONNECTIONS
Figure 4. CENTRAL SERVICE SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
Figure 5. L-1850-L-2350 – ELECTRICAL COMPARTMENT DOOR SWITCHES AND
COMPONENT HEATER CONNECTION
Figure 6. COOLING SYSTEM AND HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURE RELEASE
BALL VALVES
Figure 7. SERVICE SWITCHES
Figure 8. SERVICE SWITCHES AND CONNECTIONS – MACHINE LOCATIONS
Figure 9. CONTROLLER I2 CONNECTOR
Figure 10. STANDBY POWER JUNCTION BOX

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA001 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
GENERAL SERVICE INFORMATION

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


Figure 11. COMPUTER MONITOR AND COMPUTER KEYPAD PANEL
Figure 12. CONTROLLER STANDBY POWER SWITCHES
Figure 13. STANDBY POWER
Figure 14. BLOCKING AXLE TO PREVENT SWIVELING
Figure 15. FRAME LOCK
Figure 16. LOADER AXLE WEIGHTS – IN OPERATING MODE (NOT LOADED)
Figure 17. JACKING POINTS FOR PLACING JACK STANDS UNDER FRONT AXLE
– TYPICAL ALL MODELS
Figure 18. FRONT AXLE JACKING AND JACK STAND PLACEMENT LOCATIONS
Figure 19. LOADER FRONT AXLE JACK STANDS
Figure 20. LOADER REAR FRAME JACK STANDS - FRONT END
Figure 20A. LOADER REAR BUMPER JACK STANDS
Figure 21. LOADER RECOMMENDED JACK STAND PLACEMENT LOCATIONS
Figure 22. TOWING POINTS – REAR OF LOADER

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA001 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
ESTABLISHING A COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


ESTABLISHING A COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE
PROGRAM
A comprehensive preventive maintenance (PM) program will pay dividends to the owners over
the life of the machine in several ways:
• Fewer major component repairs and fewer repetitive repairs.
• Increased machine life and greater availability.
• Less unscheduled downtime.
• Reduced maintenance costs, labor and materials.
• Greater safety for workers and improved protection for equipment
FOUR IMPORTANT REQUIREMENTS FOR AN EFFECTIVE PM PROGRAM
PERSONNEL
The operator should accept the responsibility of walking around the machine to inspect daily
checkpoints. The instructions contained in this manual and the MODULAR PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES should be read, understood and kept handy for further
reference. A copy should be provided for each person with these responsibilities.
MANAGEMENT RESPONSE
The second requirement in an effective preventive maintenance program is quick and positive
response to a known or potential problem. If the operator indicates a potential problem, action
should be taken immediately - even if it is a minor adjustment. Any problem not taken care of
in a timely manner has the potential of causing a major breakdown.
MAINTENANCE RECORDS
The third requirement in an effective preventive maintenance program is a system for
recording material and labor costs. Well-kept records can serve as guides indicating when to
replace or rebuild a component. Keeping good records of maintenance performed on the
machine also provides a basis for planning and custom tailoring a preventive maintenance
program to the job and the environment in which the machine is working. For example, it may
be determined through records that the air filter should be replaced more periodically than the
engine manufacturer recommends. Though this may be a small adjustment, it can be one that
leads to increased engine life. This principal can be applied to other major components of the
machine, and as all aspects of the maintenance program are fine tuned, the result is less
breakdowns and controlled expense versus unexpected downtime.
Records may also indicate a trend for the type of maintenance program for the machine
beyond what is specified herein. The maintenance schedules contained in this manual are
based on hours and estimates of calendar time. These hours would be accumulated under
normal operating conditions. However, because of certain applications, duty cycles, or varying
conditions, the need for maintenance cannot always be measured in hours alone. In these
cases a weekly, twice-weekly, or monthly schedule may be more applicable.
SCHEDULED DOWNTIME
Any well-designed PM program should allow for production scheduling to
accommodate the required maintenance downtime. Accurate record keeping and analysis
of inspection data, repair downtime, component failure, spare parts inventory, operating
policies and labor costs involved should all be considered in the overall scope of the PM
program.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA003 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
ESTABLISHING A COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


MODULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES FOR LOADERS
Recommendations for regular preventive maintenance inspections and services based on
normal operating conditions are provided in the MODULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULES (POST BREAK-IN PERIOD).
This PM reflects combined information from both engine manufacturers (Detroit Diesel and
Cummins). For exact service intervals, follow the manufacturer’s recommendations. Vary the
suggested intervals more frequently, as required, when the machine is subject to extremes of
temperature, prolonged operation, sandy or dusty conditions, or exposure to moisture.
The preventive maintenance schedules provided in this publication will deal primarily with:
• Inspections - structural, mechanical, electrical and electronic.
• Lubrication schedules and requirements.
• Adjustments.
• Tire and wheel maintenance.
Make copies of the schedules and use them as check lists in the routine maintenance of
your machine.
The schedules also provide guidelines for various hourly usage intervals. The owner’s use of
the machine in production scheduling should also be considered in regards to the hourly
intervals shown on the schedules.
The following schedules are provided:
• Daily and Pre-shift Inspections and Services
• 100-Hour or Weekly Inspections and Services
• 500-Hour Inspections and Services
• 1000-Hour Inspections and Services
• 1500-Hour Inspections and Services
• 2000-Hour Inspections and Services
• 5000-Hour Inspections and Services
• 6000-Hour Inspections and Services
• 12,000-Hour Inspections and Services

DATA DOWNLOADS
Operational and production data stored in the LINCS™ computer system and the Detroit
Diesel DDEC or Cummins CENSE (as applicable) should be downloaded every monthly or
every 250 hours of operation. This data can provide key indicators for use in customizing a
preventive maintenance program and alerts to potential problems. Monthly LINCS™ data
downloads are required to meet LeTourneau, Inc. warranty requirements. Contact the closest
authorized dealer for the engine manufacturer for assistance in downloading engine
operational data.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA003 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE SWITCHES & CONNECTIONS & FIGURES 1 & 2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


SERVICE SWITCHES AND CONNECTIONS

Figure 1. BATTERY DISCONNECT KEY SWITCH

(LOCATED AT LEFT REAR OF TOW UNIT)


Figure 2. OPTIONAL JUMP START SOCKET
– 2 MODEL OPTIONS
Several switches and connections are provided on the loader for use in maintenance and
repair operations. Use of these switches and connections is recommended, as their primary

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA005 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE SWITCHES & CONNECTIONS & FIGURES 1 & 2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


function is to ensure a safe and productive working environment.

Refer also to SAFETY IN MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR OPERATIONS.

BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH


(Illustration "BATTERY DISCONNECT KEY SWITCH"):
The battery disconnect switch is located in a box at the right rear of the loader. It is a key-
operated switch that can be used to lockout the 24 VDC battery power to the machine. Refer
to illustration "SERVICE SWITCHES AND CONNECTIONS" for location on the machine.

JUMP START SOCKET (Optional)


(Illustration "OPTIONAL JUMP START SOCKET")
It is possible to damage the solid-state electronic controls of the loader and engine if jumper
cables are connected improperly or arcing occurs. There is also a possibility of serious
personal injury. Therefore, LeTourneau, Inc. recommends that the machine only be jump
started or used to jumpstart another vehicle with the optional jumpstart socket. There are two
model options available, as shown in illustration "OPTIONAL JUMPSTART SOCKET - 2
MODEL OPTIONS". Refer to illustration SERVICE SWITCHES AND CONNECTIONS for
location on the machine.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA005 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE SWITCHES & CONNECTIONS...CONT'D & FIGURES 3, 4 & 5

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Figure 3. COMPONENT HEATER AND ENGINE


OIL/COOLANT PREHEATER CONNECTIONS

Figure 4. CENTRAL SERVICE SYSTEM (OPT.)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA006 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE SWITCHES & CONNECTIONS...CONT'D & FIGURES 3, 4 & 5

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Figure 5. L-1850-L-2350 – ELECTRICAL COMPARTMENT


DOOR SWITCHES AND COMPONENT HEATER CONNECTION

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA006 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE SWITCHES & CONNECTIONS...CONT'D & FIGURES 3, 4 & 5

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


COMPONENT HEATER CONNECTIONS (Optional) (Illustration
"COMPONENT HEATER AND ENGINE OIL/COOLANT PREHEATER
CONNECTIONS")
A 220-volt receptacle is optionally provided for connecting the optional hydraulic reservoir,
axles, battery, grease reservoir, and fuel reservoir heaters. Power plug-in cords are provided
for supplying power to the optional engine coolant and oil 220-volt heaters. These connections
are located on the tow unit, inside the pivot area, on the left side of the loader. Connections
are accessible from ground level. The Models L-1850-L-2350 have an additional receptacle
for connecting power to the hydraulic tank and battery heaters. This receptacle is mounted on
the electrical control cabinet (refer to illustration "ELECTRICAL COMPARTMENT DOOR
SWITCHES AND COMPONENT HEATER CONNECTIONS"). Refer to illustration "SERVICE
SWITCHES AND CONNECTIONS" for location on the machine.

CENTRAL SERVICE SYSTEM (Optional) (Illustration "CENTRAL SERVICE


SYSTEM"):
The optional Central Service System is housed inside a protective box and mounted at the left
rear of the loader. The Central Service System provides quick-coupling connections for
refilling the fuel reservoir, engine crankcase, hydraulic reservoir and engine coolant. Different
quick couplers are provided for each component to ensure accuracy in filling. Refer to
illustration "SERVICE SWITCHES AND CONNECTIONS" for location on the machine.

Be sure to relieve pressure in the hydraulic reservoir and in the radiator by


opening the manual air release valve provided for each component before
attaching hose to the quick couplings (refer to illustration "COOLING
SYSTEM AND HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURE RELEASE BALL VALVE").

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA006 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE SWITCHES & CONNECTIONS...CONT'D & FIGURES 6 & 7

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SURGE TANK PRESSURE HYDRAULIC TANK MANUAL AIR RELEASE VALVE


RELEASE BALL VALVE AND AUTOMATIC AIR RELEASE VALVE
(ACCESSIBLE FROM TOP OF TOW UNIT) (LOCATED ON TOP OF HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR)

Figure 6. COOLING SYSTEM AND HYDRAULIC TANK PRESSURE RELEASE BALL


VALVES

(MOUNTED AT PIVOT AREA – LEFT SIDE OF


MACHINE)
Figure 7. SERVICE SWITCHES

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA007 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE SWITCHES & CONNECTIONS...CONT'D & FIGURES 6 & 7

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


SERVICE SWITCHES (REFER TO ILLUSTRATION "SERVICE
SWITCHES")
WORK LIGHTS SWITCH: The work lights switch is a two-position, left/right turn-type switch. It
is mounted on a switch box located at the pivot area, on the left side of the machine. This
switch turns on the 24 VDC service work lights mounted on each side of the radiator, mid-
engine, near the AC generator, and in the front frame. The key switch on the operator’s
console does not have to be in the ON position to operate the work lights. Refer to illustration
"SERVICE SWITCHES AND CONNECTIONS" for location on the machine.
LUBRICATION CYCLE SWITCH: The lubrication cycle switch is a momentary pushbutton
switch. It is mounted on the same switch box as the work lights switch described above. When
the lubrication cycle switch is pressed, the auto lube system will cycle. This is for manually
lubricating the machine with the automatic lubrication system and priming the lines after
refilling the grease reservoir.

L-1350: The lubrication cycle switch is wired so that the engine does not have to be running,
however, the LINCS computer system must be booted up. This requires the key switch on the
operator’s console to be in the ON position. However, compressed air system pressure must
be at least 60 psi for the lubrication cycle switch to operate.

L-1850-L-2350: The automatic lubrication system on the L-1850-L-2350 loaders is powered by


the hydraulic system. Therefore, the engine must be running for the lubrication cycle switch to
operate.

The lubrication cycle switch performs the same function as the manual lube switch located on
the operator’s console. Refer to MANUAL LUBE SWITCH and to AUTOMATIC
LUBRICATION SYSTEM OPERATION for additional information.

FILTER PURGE TIMER SWITCH: The filter purge timer switch is a two-position, left/right turn-
type switch (refer to illustration "SERVICE SWITCHES"). It is mounted on a switch box
located at the pivot area, on the left side of the machine. The filter purge timer switch turns off
the purge cycle of the LeTourneau Cartridge Filtration System (“KLENZ” System). Unless
turned off, the purge cycle will continue until compressed air system pressure drops below 90
psi. When the purge cycle occurs, the filter will emit a loud “boom” and dirt will be blown from
the hopper. The noise can be startling and dirt blowing from the hopper can present a hazard
to persons climbing the ladder adjacent to the LeTourneau Cartridge Filtration System
(“KLENZ” System) or standing under the hopper.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA007 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
SERVICE SWITCHES & CONNECTIONS...CONT'D & FIGURES 6 & 7

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Always turn the filter purge timer switch to the OFF position before
performing any service work to the loader. Bleed air pressure to zero psig
before performing any service or repair work to the LeTourneau Cartridge
Filtration System (“KLENZ” System) or other components powered by the
Compressed Air System.

When the filter purge cycle is turned off, a notice screen, with a text
message indicating the purge cycle is off, will appear on the LINCS™
computer monitor in the operator’s cab. BE SURE to turn the filter purge
timer switch to the ON position and close the manual air release valve
before returning the machine to service.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA007 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 8

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

1. SERVICE SWITCHES
2. COMPONENT HEATER CONNECTIONS
3. CENTRAL SERVICE SYSTEM
4. JUMP START SOCKET
5. BATTERY DISCONNECT SWITCH
Figure 8. SERVICE SWITCHES AND CONNECTIONS – MACHINE LOCATION

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA008 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
STANDBY POWER MODE

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


STANDBY POWER MODE (Optional)
The digitally controlled loaders are designed so that they may be used as an auxiliary power
source. With the optional connection box, a fused 3-phase power source is available to power
other equipment during maintenance or for moving equipment.

When enabling and disabling the standby power mode, the electrical
system must be turned off, locked out and grounded. Serious injury or
loss of life is possible from touching energized terminals.

STANDBY POWER MODE SETUP PROCEDURE (USING THE LOADER AS


AN AUXILIARY POWER SOURCE)

Be sure that all connections are installed correctly and safely to your
equipment. LeTourneau, Inc. assumes no responsibility for incorrect
connections or uses of the standby power mode. Connect a grounding
lead between the loader frame and the ground or the frame of the other
equipment that is to be powered.

a. Check the line-to-line voltage on board the equipment to be powered to determine if


the loader has the power capability to perform as needed. The loader has variable
line-to-line voltage from 300 VAC to 500 VAC.
b. Check the fuel tank to assure there is adequate fuel to operate the loader.
c. If the loader is to be a stationary power unit, then:
1. Park the loader near the equipment to be powered, set the park brake and shut it
off.

Place warning signs indicating that the loader is being used as a stationary
power unit and is not to be moved.

When using the loader as a stationary power unit, and no operator in the
cab, ensure that the direction selector switch remains in neutral and the
park brake remains set.

2. Chock the tires.


3. Continue with Step “f”.
d. If the loader is to be towed, then:

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA009 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
STANDBY POWER MODE

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


1. Connect a tow bar between the loader and equipment being powered. The tow bar
should be of sufficient strength to prevent damage when operating on a grade.

Cables or chains are not suitable and should not be used for towing the
loader (refer to RETRIEVING AND TOWING).

2. Remove connector I2 from the back of the Controller (refer to illustration


"CONTROLLER I2 CONNECTOR").

The loader may be propelled for repositioning or following equipment that


is being powered if I2 remains connected.

3. Ensure that the direction selector switch remains in neutral and the accelerator is
not depressed.
4. Release the park brake before the towing begins.
5. Continue with Step “f”.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA009 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
STANDBY POWER MODE

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Extreme caution should be used when propelling the loader while in


standby power mode and powering other equipment. It is possible to pull
apart the power cable between the loader and the equipment being
powered. This would be a safety hazard and result in damage to the loader,
cable and equipment.

e. Connect the three-phase leads from the equipment being powered to standby power
junction box if I2 remains connected (refer to illustration "STANDBY POWER
JUNCTION BOX").

The loader provides a three-phase power source for line-to-line loads such
as a transformer on the equipment being powered. It is not designed to
provide phase-to-neutral power in the standby power mode and a neutral
connect is not provided.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA009 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
STANDBY POWER MODE...CONT'D & FIGURES 9 & 10

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Figure 9. CONTROLLER I2 CONNECTOR

REFER TO TA-6702-B FOR THIS


ILLUSTRATION
1. JUNCTION BOX
2. BUSS BAR - SHORT
3. BUSS BAR - MEDIUM
4. BUSS BAR - LONG
5. WIRE CODE
6. CLEAT
7. INSULATOR
8. FUSE - 1000V, 900 AMP
Figure 10. STANDBY POWER JUNCTION
BOX

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA010 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
STANDBY POWER MODE...CONT'D & FIGURES 9 & 10

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

If the neutral lead is connected between the load and the loader, the neutral
current must be limited to 100 amps. In certain cases, it may be necessary
to power a system with the neutral connected. In such cases, the neutral
current should be limited to 100 amps. Current in excess of 100 amps may
damage the generator.

f. Start the engine and allow it to idle until the operating temperature is reached.

There is high voltage present in the electrical cabinet and the standby
power junction box when the engine select switch is placed in HIGH
position.
Ensure the leads to the load are open circuited; i.e., circuit breakers open
or generator may not prime.

g. Place the engine select switch in the HI position.


h. Access generator voltage and frequency data with the channel browser function of the
LINCS™ computer (refer to illustration "COMPUTER MONITOR AND COMPUTER
KEYPAD PANEL").
i. On the Controller, rotate both FREQ and VOLTAGE knobs fully clockwise (refer to
illustration "CONTROLLER STANDBY POWER SWITCHES").
j. Place the standby power switch on the controller to the ON position (refer to illustration
"CONTROLLER STANDBY POWER SWITCHES").
k. Adjust the voltage knob until the desired line-to-line voltage is obtained (VGEN X 100 =
VOLTAGE). The voltage knob may be adjusted to provide correct voltage at the
equipment to compensate for line losses.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA010 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
STANDBY POWER MODE...CONT'D & FIGURES 9 & 10

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

The controller has two control knobs that only affect the generator output
when the standby power switch is in the ON position. The FREQ knob will
vary the frequency from 47 Hz (engine at 1410 RPM) to 66 Hz (engine at
1980 RPM). The voltage knob will vary the line-to-line voltage from 300
VAC to 500 VAC. If engine RPM exceeds +10% or -15% of set values, the
generator output will shut down. The standby power switch and the engine
select switch will then have to be cycled to re-enable the voltage regulator.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA010 ( d 3 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

2 3 4 TA6702

TA-6702-8(2)
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 004AA010 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 11

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


REFER TO TA-9918 FOR THIS
ILLUSTRATION
1. PM ALERT LIGHT (BLUE)
2. WARNING LIGHT (AMBER)
3. ALERT LIGHT (RED)
4. KEYPAD
5. PARK BRAKE CONTROL
6. KEY SWITCH
7. MONITOR
Figure 11. COMPUTER MONITOR
AND COMPUTER KEYPAD
PANEL

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA011 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!
TA9918

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9
OFF
ON

1 START
0

TA-9918-8

TA9918-8
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 004AA011 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
STANDBY POWER MODE...CONT'D & FIGURE 12

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


REFER TO TA-9204-P FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION
Figure 12. CONTROLLER STANDBY POWER
SWITCHES

l. Select VH on the LINCS™ computer and adjust the FREQ knob until the desired
frequency is obtained.

Some equipment may use ground fault/earth leakage detection devices that
may conflict with the optional ground fault system. Where a conflict exists,
the device on the equipment being powered must be disabled. DO NOT
disable the ground fault system on the loader!

m. Apply the equipment load slowly and verify correct phase sequence at the equipment
being powered.

There is no feedback connection between the generator control and the


powered equipment. If more horsepower is being required from the engine
than it can supply at that operating speed, the RPM will begin to droop.
When RPM decreases to 85% of the no-load RPM, the generator output will
be disabled and unload the engine.

n. If the generator output is lost due to either applying the load too quickly or the load is
excessive, the generator and its controls can be reset, as follows:
1. Remove the electrical load.
2. Place the engine select switch to LO position.
3. Place the standby power switch to OFF.
4. Place the engine select switch to HIGH. The generator should re-prime. If the
generator does not re-prime, place the engine select switch to LOW, rotating the
FREQ and VOLTAGE knobs fully clockwise. Then place the engine select switch
to HIGH.
5. Place the standby power switch to ON.
6. Readjust output frequency and voltage, if required.
7. Reapply the electrical load slowly.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA012 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
STANDBY POWER MODE...CONT'D & FIGURE 12

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


RESTORING THE LOADER (AFTER USE AS AN AUXILIARY POWER
SOURCE)
a. Place the engine select switch in LOW position after load demand has been shut down.
b. Allow the engine to idle for a minimum of five minutes.
c. Turn the engine off.
d. Place the standby power switch to OFF.
e. Disconnect the three-phase leads, the ground lead and (if used) the neutral lead
between the loader and the powered equipment. Secure the junction box cover in place.
f. Disconnect tow bar if used
g. Reinstall connector I2 on the Controller (if removed).

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA012 ( d 2 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA9204

TA9204-P
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 004AA012 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 13

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

1. ELECTRICAL CONTROL CABINET


2. STANDBY POWER JUNCTION BOX
Figure 13. STANDBY POWER

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA013 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER JACKING INSTRUCTIONS & FIGURES 14 & 15

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


LOADER JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
The following precautions and instructions should be followed for safe jacking of the loader:
• Be sure the loader is on an adequate surface to support its weight when jacked
up.
• NEVER jack up the machine with the bucket and lift arms.
• The bucket should be lowered to three to four feet off the ground and placed in
full rollback position.
• Be sure to provide adequate jacks or hoists when lifting the machine or any of its
components. Refer to illustration "LOADER AXLE WEIGHTS IN OPERATING
MODE (NOT LOADED)" for the proper jacking points and weights. If placing jack
stands under the front axle, the machine is jacked from the side as shown in
illustration "JACKING POINTS FOR PLACING JACK STANDS UNDER FRONT
AXLE".
• After hoisting the loader, it is recommended jack stands be used for support.
Refer to illustrations "LOADER FRONT AXLE JACK STANDS" and "LOADER
REAR BUMPER JACK STANDS" for recommended construction methods and to
"FRONT AXLE JACKING AND JACK STAND PLACEMENT LOCATIONS" and
"LOADER RECOMMENDED JACK STAND PLACEMENT LOCATIONS".

Illustrations "LOADER AXLE WEIGHTS" and "JACKING POINTS FOR


PLACING JACK STANDS UNDER FRONT AXLE" show front jacking points
when using and not using jack stands. When jacking under the front axle
or placing jack stands under the front axle, it is essential to get as close as
possible to structural support member as shown in illustration "FRONT
AXLE JACKING AND JACK STAND PLACEMENT LOCATIONS". Placing the
jack or jack stand in any other area could cause damage to the axle.

Figure 14. BLOCKING AXLE TO PREVENT SWIVELING

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA015 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER JACKING INSTRUCTIONS & FIGURES 14 & 15

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

If both wheels of the oscillating axle are off the ground at the same time,
the axle may swivel vertically. This is a potentially hazardous situation.
Both sides of the axle should be blocked to prevent swiveling (refer to
illustration "BLOCKING AXLE TO PREVENT SWIVELING").

(LEFT SIDE OF MACHINE AT PIVOT AREA)

Figure 15. FRAME LOCK

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA015 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LOADER JACKING INSTRUCTIONS & FIGURES 14 & 15

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Before jacking the machine, place the frame lock in the locked position.
Following completion of service or repair, BE SURE to place the frame lock
in the unlocked position or machine damage will result (refer to illustration
"FRAME LOCK").

The LINCS™ computer system provides a means of aligning the front and
rear frames for installing the frame lock without a person entering the pivot
area during the alignment process. To use this method, access the main
menu on the LINCS™ computer system by pressing the number “1” on the
computer keypad. Choose option #3, “Channel Browser”. Next, press “1”
and use the left/right arrow keys to choose “Hydraulics”. Then, enter the
number “2”, which will enable data for the machine’s various hydraulic
functions. Use the left/right arrow keys to select “Steering System”. View
the steering angle data. Steer the loader left or right until the angle is “0”.
The front and rear frames are perfectly aligned and the frame lock can now
be moved to the locked position.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA015 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 16

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


REFER TO TA-9517 FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION

Front Frame Each Point Tow Unit Each Point


L-1350 111,000 lb (50,348 kg) 84,000 lb (38,102 kg)
L-1850 154,000 lb (69,853 kg) 104,000 lb (47,173 kg)
L-2350 172,000 lb (78,017 kg) 126,000 lb (57,152 kg)
Figure 16. LOADER AXLE WEIGHTS – IN OPERATING MODE (NOT
LOADED)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA016 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA9517

TA9517-8
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 004AA016 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 17

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

PLACE JACK UNDER FRAME EACH SIDE AT LOCATION INDICATED.


PLACE JACK STANDS UNDER AXLE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO
FRAME STRUCTURE SUPPORT MEMBER AS SHOWN IN ILLUSTRATION
"FRONT AXLE JACKING AND JACK STAND PLACEMENT LOCATIONS".
Figure 17. JACKING POINTS FOR PLACING JACK STANDS UNDER FRONT AXLE –
TYPICAL ALL MODELS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA017 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 18

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

L-1350

L-1850-L-2350
Figure 18. FRONT AXLE JACKING AND JACK STAND PLACEMENT LOCATIONS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA018 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 19 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 004AA019 (p)
Figure 19. LOADER FRONT AXLE JACK STANDS

PART SIZE RAW MATERIAL


1. BASE PLATE 1/2" N20BHT
2. SUPPORT PLATE 1/2" N20BHT
3. SUPPORT PLATE 1/2" N20BHT
4. FRONT TUBE PIPE 18" X-HVY A-53
5. PLATE CAP 1-1/2" N20BHT
6. FORKLIFT PLATE 1" N20BHT
7. PAD PLATE 2" N20BHT

NOTE 1: Overall height of front frame jack stand varies with loader model and height
of tires. Typically, 48" (1219 mm) to 50" (1270 mm) is suitable for L-950\L-
1350 and 55" (1397 mm) to 57" (1448 mm) is typically suitable for L-1850/L-
2350. Top of cradle is 2" (51 mm) above top of jack stand top plate. It is
essential to measure the tires and calculate optimal height with wooden
blocking in place to ensure tires clear the ground.
NOTE 2: Placement of forklift plates is relative to the height of the jack stand. They
are normally positioned 12" (305 mm) to 14" (356 mm) below the top of the
jack stand.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA019 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA1

3
2

4
5

FRONT AXLE JACK STANDS


LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 004AA019 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 20 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 004AA020
Figure 20. LOADER REAR FRAME JACK STANDS - FRONT END

PART SIZE RAW MATERIAL


1. BASE PLATE 1/2" N20BHT
2. SUPPORT PLATE 1/2" N20BHT
3. SUPPORT PLATE 1/2" N20BHT
4. MIDDLE TUBE PIPE 18" X-HVY A-53
5. PLATE CAP 1-1/2" N20BHT
6. FORKLIFT PLATE 1" N20BHT

NOTE 1: Overall height of rear frame jack stand - front end varies with loader model
and height of tires. Typically, 48" (1219 mm) to 50" (1270 mm) is suitable for
L-950\L-1350 and 55" (1397 mm) to 57" (1448 mm) is typically suitable for L-
1850/L-2350. It is essential to measure the tires and calculate optimal height
with wooden blocking in place to ensure tires clear the ground.
NOTE 2: Placement of forklift plates is relative to the height of the jack stand. They
are normally positioned 12" (305 mm) to 14" (356 mm) below the top of the
jack stand.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA020 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA1

3
2

4
5

REAR BUMPER JACK STANDS


LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 004AA020 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 20.1 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 004AA020A(p)
Figure 20.1. LOADER REAR BUMPER JACK STANDS

PART SIZE RAW MATERIAL


1. BASE PLATE 1/2" N20BHT
2. SUPPORT PLATE 1/2" N20BHT
3. SUPPORT PLATE 1/2" N20BHT
4. REAR TUBE PIPE 18" X-HVY A-53
5. PLATE CAP 1-1/2" N20BHT
6. FORKLIFT PLATE 1" N20BHT

NOTE 1: Overall height of rear bumper jack stand varies with loader model and height
of tires. Typically, 38" (965 mm) to 40" (1016 mm) is suitable for L950\L-1350
and 47" (1194 mm) to 48" (1219 mm) is typically suitable for L-1850/L-2350.
It is essential to measure the tires and calculate optimal height with wooden
blocking in place to ensure tires clear the ground.
NOTE 2: Placement of forklift plates is relative to the height of the jack stand. They
are normally positioned 12" (305 mm) to 14" (356 mm) below the top of the
jack stand.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA020.1 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA1

3
2

4
5

LOADER REAR FRAME-FRONT END JACK STANDS


LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 004AA020.1 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
FIGURE 21 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


REFER TO ILLUSTRATION ON PAGE 004AA021 (p)
Figure 21. LOADER RECOMMENDED JACK STAND PLACEMENT LOCATIONS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA021 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE TA9518

L-1100USEDFORILLUSTRATIVEPURPOSES.
JACKSTANDSAREPLACEDINSAME
LOCATIONSALLMODELS
BUCKETATCARRYHEIGHT
INROLLBACKPOSITION

FRAMELOCKIN
LOCKEDPOSITION

CLEAROFGROUND RADIUSOFTIRE
+6" (150mm)
JACKSTANDSPLACEDUNDER JACKSTANDSPLACEDUNDER
TA9518-8 FRONTAXLEEACHSIDEASCLOSE REARBUMPEREACHSIDEINLINE
ASPOSSIBLETOFRAME WITHFRAME.
STRUCTURALSUPPORTMEMBER.

TA9518-8
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 004AA021 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
RETRIEVING & TOWING & FIGURE 22 1

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


RETRIEVING AND TOWING
In the event the machine is disabled in the workplace, the rear bumper of the loader is
equipped with three points for attachment of towing devices. It is essential to not exceed
131,000 lbs. of pull per attachment point. Refer to illustration "TOWING POINTS - REAR OF
LOADER" for towing points.

Figure 22. TOWING POINTS – REAR OF LOADER

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AA023 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SECTION 4, PART 2
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE
PROCEDURES FROM COMMISSIONING TO
1000 HOURS
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES
FROM COMMISSIONING TO 1000 HOURS
LETOURNEAU, INC.
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER
OSL- 4 PART 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SERVICE PERSONNEL AND OPERATOR TRAINING AND ADVISORIES
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES CHECKLIST FROM COMMISSIONING TO
1000 HOURS
WARNING AND CAUTIONS
10-HOURS NON-MATERIAL HANDLING BREAK-IN PERIOD OPERATIONS
OPERATOR’S DAILY INSPECTION
MONTHLY
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM INITIAL 10-HOUR AND 500-HOUR
INSPECTIONS AND SERVICE
BALL JOINT PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM INITIAL 2-, 6-, 14-, 100-, 500-
AND 1000-HOUR INSPECTIONS
INITIAL 500-HOUR ELECTRICAL PM
INITIAL 500-HOUR SERVICE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM INITIAL 500-HOUR ELECTRONIC SYSTEM
INSPECTION

LeTourneau, Inc. and your distributor make every effort to ensure your new loader is erected
and serviced properly before it is delivered to you. However, it is ESSENTIAL that the
following break-in period service procedures and training be performed before the machine is
placed in service and during the break-in period. Following the break-in period, a program of
regular inspection and service, per the MODULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULES - POST BREAK-IN PERIOD is essential to receive a long and economical
service life from the loader.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB001 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

LeTourneau’s warranty provisions are conditional on the owner’s


compliance with these Break-in Period Service Procedures and subsequent
maintenance operations as outlined in the MODULAR PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES. Special attention should be placed on
proper operation, inspection and maintenance of the DC drive motors as
outlined in DC DRIVE MOTOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE.
Report any operational or mechanical abnormalities to your distributor
IMMEDIATELY. Problems with the engine should be referred to the engine
manufacturer’s closest authorized service center. The loader should not
be operated if any problem with the brakes, engine or steering is noted or if
any hydraulic system warning screen is activated.

SERVICE PERSONNEL AND OPERATOR TRAINING AND ADVISORIES


The following training should be conducted before Service Upon Receipt Procedures and
machine operations are begun:
a. Service Personnel Training: Anyone performing service on the machine should read
and understand the instructions in this SERVICE MANUAL and the engine
manufacturer’s owner’s manual (available through engine manufacturer's website)
before attempting to inspect or service the loader.
Service personnel should pay special attention to SAFETY IN MAINTENANCE
OPERATIONS, and SERVICE SWITCHES AND SERVICE CONNECTIONS. All
instructions provided in these articles should be followed, as applicable.

Service and repair training is available through LeTourneau, Inc. Refer to


LETOURNEAU SERVICE AND REPAIR TRAINING.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB001 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Special attention should be placed on the use of proper lubricants as


outlined in illustration "LUBRICATION AND FLUID SPECIFICATIONS".
Those specifications cover preliminary and all subsequent preventive
maintenance operations. Use lubricants and anti-freeze solutions suitable
for lowest expected temperatures. Note and comply with any special
instruction tags attached to the engine or other components.
Do not mix brands of lubricants without consulting lubricant
manufacturers. Damage to bearings or other components may result from
the mixing of incompatible lubricants.

The hydraulic pump gearbox is factory equipped with synthetic oil. It is


recommended that synthetic oil be used for all oil changes. Refer to
HYDRAULIC PUMP GEARBOX SERVICE for additional information.

b. Operator Training: Operators must be familiar with all aspects of machine operation
and safety as listed in this SERVICE MANUAL before starting and operating the
loader. Improper operation can cause injury and machine damage.

Both service personnel and operators should pay special attention to the
operating and maintenance information from the various suppliers whose
products are used on the machine. This information is provided throughout
the SERVICE MANUAL, where appropriate.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB001 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES

NEVER remove the axle access covers unless the electrical system is shut
off, locked out, and grounded. Contact with energized high voltage
terminals inside the axle will cause serious injury or loss of life.
BE SURE all electrical power is turned off before touching ANY electrical
connection.

a. Operate the machine a minimum of 10 hours in non-material handling operations before


placing in normal service. Refer to BASIC MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
NON-MATERIAL HANDLING OPERATIONS for additional information.
b. Motors, drivers, and hydraulic pump gearbox should be checked for overheating and oil
leaks.
c. From the first day the loader is put in service, perform OPERATOR’S DAILY OR PRE-
SHIFT WALK-AROUND INSPECTION, per the instructions in the MODULAR
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES (POST BREAK-IN PERIOD).
d. Torque wheel bolts after the first two hours of operation and again after the next six and
fourteen hours of operation and then at 100-hours of operation. Check wheel bolt
torque after each 500-hours of operation thereafter.
e. Check components lubricated by the automatic lubrication system daily for a “wet” look
of fresh grease to ensure the automatic lubrication system is operating properly. Refer
to AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM for additional information.
f. Check torque on ball cap capscrews after the first 2-, 6-, 14-, 100-, 250- and 500-hours
of operation. Check torque every 500-hours thereafter. Refer to correct torque
sequence and torque values for the ball joints.
g. Perform dial indicator inspections of the ball caps after the initial 100-, 250-, 500-, 1000-
and 2000-hours. Perform dial indicator inspections after each 2000 hours thereafter.
h. Check torque on torque nuts on Roll Over Protective Structure (ROPS) after initial 250-
hours of operation and every 500 hours thereafter — should be 114 ft. lbs. (154.6 N•m)
per bolt (lubricated with 30W motor oil).
i. Check DC motor brush condition after the first 500 hours of operation and every 500-
hours thereafter. Refer to DC MOTOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
(APPLICABLE TO MACHINES WITH M40/JS TRACTION MOTORS ONLY) for
additional information. This inspection will require access to axle housings. Engine
should be shut down and all electrical systems grounded.
j. Clean driver oil filtration strainers and replace spin-on filters at 500-hours of operation
and every 2000-hours thereafter. Oil samples should be taken for wear trend analysis
every 500-hours. Refer to DRIVER MAINTENANCE AND ROTATION.
k. Take oil samples from hydraulic pump gearbox for lubrication oil analysis after the initial
500-hours of operation and every 500 hours thereafter. Change filter after initial 500-
hours of operation and every 1500-hours thereafter.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB002 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


l. Take oil sample from hydraulic reservoir for lubricating oil analysis after initial 500-hours
of operation and every 500-hours thereafter. Use caution not to allow contamination
to enter the hydraulic reservoir when collecting the sample. Replace hydraulic
filters after initial 500 hours of operation and every 1500-hours thereafter. Refer to
SERVICE REQUIREMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS for additional information.
m. Perform Power Unit Vibration Test and Generator Bearing Temperature Test initial 500-
hour interval and every 500-hours thereafter (refer to AC GENERATOR).
n. Monthly downloads of LINCS™ computer system operational and loadweigh data must
be submitted to the LeTourneau, Inc. Product Support Department. Failure to deliver
these monthly reports may adversely affect warranty disposition. Contact your
authorized LeTourneau, Inc. distributor for assistance in this matter.

Be sure to relieve air pressure in the hydraulic tank before opening. This is
done with the manual air release valve (refer to illustration "HYDRAULIC
TANK AIR RELEASE VALVE").

Use the BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURE CHECKLIST to ensure


no items are overlooked and retain a copy of it in the machine’s permanent
file to document customer’s responsibilities for warranty requirements.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB002 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERV PROC CHECKLIST FROM COMM TO 1K HOURS

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES CHECKLIST


FROM COMMISSIONING TO 1000 HOURS
The BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES CHECKLIST is provided for the owner to
use during the loader’s break-in period to ensure no items of maintenance that are critical to
the machine’s initial services are overlooked.
Keep a copy of this form and the OPERATOR’S DAILY OR PRE-SHIFT WALK-AROUND
INSPECTION forms, completed during the service upon receipt period, in the loader’s
permanent file to document customer responsibilities for warranty requirements. Following the
initial 500-hour servicing of the loader, use the MODULAR PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULES (POST BREAK-IN PERIOD).

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

ANYONE performing inspections or service procedures to the loader


should be familiar with ALL instructions contained in the machine’s
SERVICE MANUAL. We especially draw your attention to SAFETY IN
MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS and SERVICE SWITCHES AND
CONNECTIONS.

The PM program should be conducted only with the machine completely


shut off and the electrical system grounded. This is especially significant
when removing access covers to gain access to electrical components
such as the drive motors. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE
AXLE ACCESS COVERS BE REMOVED WHILE THE MACHINE IS
ENERGIZED. Accidental contact with exposed high voltage terminals in
the interior may cause death or serious injury.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB005 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERV PROC CHECKLIST FROM COMM TO 1K HOURS

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

It is essential that the following pre-maintenance preparations be made


prior to performing inspections or service operations to ensure a safe and
productive working environment:

1. Lockout the loader’s starting capability with the optional


maintenance lockout switch (if the machine is so equipped). If the
machine is not equipped with the maintenance lockout switch,
place a DO NOT OPERATE sign on the controls and remove the
key. Serious injury or loss of life is possible if the machine is
started or moved while inspections or maintenance operations are
being conducted.
2. Move the frame lock to the locked position. Enter the pivot area of
the machine only when absolutely necessary.
3. Turn the filter purge timer switch on the service switch box to the
OFF position.
4. Lower bucket to the ground and relieve hoist and bucket circuit
pressure by using auxiliary pilot pump switch.

Following completion of maintenance or repair operations, it is critically


important that the frame lock be removed from the locked position and
properly stowed and filter purge timer switch turned to the ON position or
machine damage will result.

Be sure to provide adequate jacks and hoists when lifting the machine or
any of its components. Be sure the loader is on an adequate surface to
support its weight when jacked up. NEVER jack up the machine with the
bucket and lift arms (refer to illustration "LOADER AXLE WEIGHTS").

Caution should be exercised when jacking the machine. If both wheels of


the oscillating axle are off the ground at the same time, the axle may swivel
vertically. This is a potentially hazardous situation. Both sides of the axle
should be blocked to prevent swiveling.

The left or right side of the loader is determined from standing behind it or
sitting behind the wheel, not standing in front and facing it. Engine left
and right bank are determined by viewing engine from the flywheel end.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB005 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BREAK-IN PERIOD SERV PROC CHECKLIST FROM COMM TO 1K HOURS

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


BREAK-IN PERIOD SERVICE PROCEDURES CHECKLIST
FROM COMMISSIONING TO 1000 HOURS
MACHINE: DATE: COMPLETED BY:
OK Needs
Attention
10-HOUR NON-MATERIAL HANDLING BREAK-IN PERIOD OPERATIONS
a. Operate in non-material handling operations for 10 hours. Refer to BASIC
MACHINE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS NON-MATERIAL HANDLING
OPERATIONS for additional information.
1. Torque wheel bolts after first two
hours of operation.
2. Torque wheel bolts again after
first six and fourteen hours of
operation and then at 100 hours
of operation.
3. Check for hydraulic leaks after
first 10 hours of operation
4. Check hydraulic pump gearbox
for leaks - check all gasketed
areas.
OPERATOR’S DAILY INSPECTION
Perform OPERATOR’S DAILY OR PRE-SHIFT WALK-AROUND INSPECTION.
MONTHLY
Submit LINCS COMPUTER SYSTEM
OPERATING AND LOADWEIGH DATA to
LeTourneau, Inc. Product Support
Department in Longview, Texas.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM INITIAL 10-HOUR AND


500-HOUR INSPECTIONS AND SERVICE

Refer to LUBRICATING OIL ANALYSIS for instructions regarding initial


500-hour oil sampling.
10 Hours 500 Hours
OK Needs OK Needs
Attention Attention
a. Check drivers, hydraulic system and hydraulic pump
gearbox for oil leaks.
b. DRIVERS: Clean strainers; replace spin-on filters.
c. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AND HYDRAULIC PUMP
GEARBOX: Replace spin-on filters.
d. Take oil samples for oil analysis.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB007 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BALL JOINT PM PROG INITIAL 2, 6, 14, 100, 500, 1K HR INSP

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


BALL JOINT PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM INITIAL 2-, 6-, 14-, 100-, 500- and 1000-HOUR INSPECTIONS

Refer to BALL JOINT PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM for specifications and instructions for inspecting the ball
joints.

Dial indicator inspections of the ball joints requires operational tests of the machine. Refer to BALL JOINT PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE PROGRAM for safety precautions.
2 Hours 6 Hours 14 Hours 100 Hours 250 Hours 500 Hours 1000 Hrs.
OK Needs OK Needs OK Needs OK Needs OK Needs OK Needs OK Needs
Attention Attention Attention Attention Attention Attention Attention
a. Check torque on ball
cap bolts.
1. Lift arms
(a) Right
(b) Left
2. Hoist cylinders
(a) Right
(b) Left
3. Middle Pivot
(a) Upper
(b) Lower

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB008 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
BALL JOINT PM PROG INITIAL 2, 6, 14, 100, 500, 1K HR INSP

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


2 Hours 6 Hours 14 Hours 100 Hours 250 Hours 500 Hours 1000 Hrs.
OK Needs OK Needs OK Needs OK Needs OK Needs OK Needs OK Needs
Attention Attention Attention Attention Attention Attention Attention
4. Rear Axle Pivot
(a) Front
(b) Rear
b. Perform dial indicator
inspections of the ball
joints
1. Lift Arms
(a) Right
(b) Left
2. Hoist Cylinders
(a) Right
(b) Left
3. Middle Pivot
(a) Upper
(b) Lower
4. Rear Axle Pivot
(a) Front
(b) Rear

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions
or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the
mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB008 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INITIAL 500-HOUR ELECTRICAL PM

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

INITIAL 500-HOUR ELECTRICAL PM


(will require energized and non-energized tests and inspections)
OK Needs
Attention
a. Check Batteries:
1. Check terminal posts and clamps.
2. Check wires for rubbing.
3. Check electrolyte level.
4. Clean battery tops.
b. Cab Electrics:
1. Heater/air conditioner:
(a) Check blower speeds and operation.
(b) Check vent operation.
(c) Check air conditioner controls operation.
2. Check to ensure that warning lights and buzzer operate for a few
seconds when key switch is turned on.
3. Check to ensure that the gauges are working.
4. Check operation of all lights (driving, working and interior).
5. Check direction control switch operation.
c. Generator (refer to AC GENERATOR):
1. Check brush length.
2. Record brush length (check the same brushes every 500 hours):
(a) Inside brushes ____________”
(b) Endbell side brushes ____________”
3. Check brush spring condition.
4. Clean generator.
5. Check condition of slip rings.
(a) Good film
(b) Uneven wear
(c) Arcing
6. Check to ensure external wiring to the generator is secure.
7. Check cables going to electrical cabinet for proper insulation and
retention.
8. Check all brush springs to ensure they are fully installed and secure
(refer to WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS).
9. Check bearings for leaking grease.
10. Conduct vibration testing.
11. Conduct bearing temperature test.
d. Power cables.
1. Check cables from back of SCR box to generator.
2. Check battery cable to starter.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB009 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INITIAL 500-HOUR ELECTRICAL PM

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


OK Needs
Attention
e. Braking Grid Resistors.
1. Clean. If steam cleaning or using air to clean, be careful not to
damage the mica on the mounts.
2. Check the resistors to ensure they are secure and not warped or
burned.
3. Check the mounting structure to ensure the bolts are secure.
4. Check the wiring harness and connections.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB009 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INITIAL 500-HOUR ELECTRICAL PM...CONT'D

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


INITIAL 500-HOUR ELECTRICAL PM (continued)
(Will require energized and non-energized tests and inspections.)
BRUSH WEAR MEASUREMENT AND CONDITION RECORD
REFER TO TA8010-5 FOR THIS ILLUSTRATION
MOTOR NO. BRUSH DIM. DIM. ANY SPECIAL CONDITIONS
NO. OF BRUSHES
1.
#1
FRONT 2.
LEFT 3.
MOTOR 4.
5.
1.
#2 2.
FRONT 3.
RIGHT
MOTOR 4.
5.
1.
#3 2.
REAR
3.
LEFT
MOTOR 4.
5.
1.
#4 2.
REAR
3.
RIGHT
MOTOR 4.
5.

1. QUANTITY OF BRUSH TRACKS PER MOTOR COMMUTATOR VARIES WITH THE


MOTOR TYPE AND SIZE.
2. BRUSH #1 IS ALWAYS THE BRUSH CLOSEST TO THE RISERS.
3. SEE CHAPTERS 3 AND 4 OF “TAKING CARE OF YOUR DC MOTOR” FOR
CONDITIONS TO LOOK FOR.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB012 ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

TA8010-5

TA8010-5
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 004AB012 ( p1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INITIAL 500-HOUR ELECTRICAL PM...CONT'D

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


INITIAL 500-HOUR ELECTRICAL PM (continued)
(Will require engine shutdown or controls grounded.)
BRUSH T.I.R. MEASUREMENT AND CONDITION RECORD

MOTOR TRACK T.I.R. MAX. BAR–TO– SURFACE CONDITION - SEE


NO. NO. BAR NOTE
#1 1.
FRONT 2.
LEFT 3.
MOTOR 4.
#2 1.
FRONT 2.
RIGHT 3.
MOTOR 4.
#3 1.
REAR 2.
LEFT 3.
MOTOR 4.
#4 1.
REAR 2.
RIGHT 3.
MOTOR 4.

1. QUANTITY OF BRUSH TRACKS PER MOTOR VARIES WITH THE MOTOR TYPE AND SIZE.
2. BRUSH #1 IS ALWAYS THE BRUSH CLOSEST TO THE RISERS.
3. IN THE “SURFACE CONDITIONS” COLUMN, INDICATE OBSERVED CONDITION OF
COMMUTATOR SURFACE CONCERNING THE FOLLOWING: (a) CONDITION OF FILM, (b) SIGNS
OF ARCING, (c) GROOVING, (d) OTHER CHARACTERISTICS. REFER TO “TAKING CARE OF
YOUR DC MOTOR” FOR AN INTERPRETATION OF THE OBSERVATIONS.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB013 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
INITIAL 500-HOUR SERVICE

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


INITIAL 500-HOUR SERVICE

Item to Check OK Needs


Attention
a. Change hydraulic pump gearbox filter. Refill gearbox. Be sure to
use correct oil when refilling. NOTE: Five gallons of synthetic oil is
furnished with the loader for refilling.
b. Take oil sample from hydraulic reservoir for lubricating oil analysis.
Use caution not to allow contamination to enter the hydraulic
reservoir when collecting the sample.
c. Replace hydraulic filters and check for leaks at HI throttle following
replacement. Prime hydraulic pumps following filter
replacement.
d. Check torque on Roll Over Protective Structure torque nuts —
should be 114 ft. lbs. (154.6 N•m) per bolt (lubricated with 30W
motor oil).

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB014 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1350/L-1850/L-2350 PM 500-HR ELECTRONIC SYS INSP

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


L-1350-L-1850-L-2350 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PROGRAM 500-HOUR ELECTRONIC SYSTEM
INSPECTION
Typically, if there are no operational complaints and no warning messages, only a brief
system test is required to ensure certain basic signal values are within specification.
The below values can be viewed on the display screen by depressing the “1” button on
the keypad and selecting the “Browse Channels” in the menu selection. Then select
the submenu of “Electrical” and “Controller” to view the signals listed below.
Check the switches and potentiometers on the front of the Controller:
Standby Power: Down (off)
Load Bank: Down (off)
Operating Motors: All - Up (on)
Front Traction, Rear Traction – Fully Clockwise
Service
Signal Value Checked Required
 
1. Start engine. Switch to high idle after VGEN 490 to 510
engine warm-up. Ensure Park Brake L-1350 VAC
is set.
VGEN 340 to 360
L-1850 VAC
VGEN 340 to 360
L-2350 VAC
VH 65.5 to
66.5 Hertz
I Rotor 15 to 30
AMP
2. Select Forward; depress accelerator VAW 9 to 10
fully. VDC
VE -6.5 to -7
VDC
VIF 240 to 260
AMP
IF 240 to 260
AMP

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB015 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1350/L-1850/L-2350 PM 500-HR ELECTRONIC SYS INSP

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

3. Release accelerator. VAW 1.0 to 1.6


VDC
VE -.5 to +.5
VDC
VIF -.5 to .5
VDC
IF -.5 to +.5
VDC
4. Depress service brake pedal to IF 160 to 190
activate boost switch. AMP
5. Release service brake pedal. Select VAW 9 to 10
Reverse; depress accelerator fully. VDC
VE +6.5 to +7
VDC
VIF 240 to 260
AMP
IF 240 to 260
AMP
6. Release accelerator (no signal to
check this step)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB015 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1350/L-1850/L-2350 PM PROG 500-HR ELECTRONIC SYS INSP

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


Model Service
Signal Value Checked Required
 
7. Select Forward, depress 445 to 800 VIA1
accelerator fully. AMP
VIA2 445 to 800
Verify proper front AMP
L-1350
traction pot VIA3 445 to 800
operation by AMP
observing the VIA4 445 to 800
shown variance in AMP
VIA1 and VIA2 VIA1 500 to 1050
when turning the AMP
front traction pot
VIA2 500 to 1050
from fully AMP
counterclockwise to L-1850
VIA3 500 to 1050
full clockwise. AMP
Verify proper rear
traction pot VIA4 500 to 1050
AMP
operation by
observing the VIA1 640 to 1250
AMP
shown variance in
VIA3 and VIA4 VIA2 640 to 1250
when turning the AMP
L-2350
rear traction pot VIA3 640 to 1250
from fully AMP
counterclockwise to VIA4 640 to 1250
fully clockwise. AMP
Dynamic Checks: Move the machine to an open area away from the
shop and from obstacles.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB016 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1350/L-1850/L-2350 PM PROG 500-HR ELECTRONIC SYS INSP

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

8. Release Park Brake; accelerate machine to 5 mph, release


accelerator. Machine should dynamically brake to a stop.
9. Accelerate machine to top speed. Top Speed
speed should be approximately 10
M1 rpm
mph (L-1350-L-1850-L-2350)
(speedometer reading), and individual M2 rpm
motor speeds should be at M3 rpm
approximately 2200 RPM (L-1350) or
2300 RPM (L-1850-L-2350). M4 rpm
During acceleration, motor voltages should VM1
peak at approximately 550 VDC (L-1350) or VM2
650 VDC (L-1850-L-2350). VM3
VM4
10. Release accelerator while traveling at VM1
top speed. Motor voltages should VM2
peak at about -520 VDC (L-1350) or -
VM3
600 VDC (L-1850-L-2350) during
braking. VM4
Stall Test: Take machine to area where bucket can be placed into a
bank to stall the machine.
11. Put direction select into Forward and IA1
fully depress the accelerator, pushing
the bucket against the bank. Ensure IA2
all wheels are stalled. Quickly verify
the four IA current readings. These IA3
readings should equal the respective
VIA levels, which can be adjusted by IA4
the Traction potentiometers.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB016 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
L-1350/L-1850/L-2350 PM PROG 500-HR ELECTRONIC SYS INSP

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

To verify proper SCR firing, an additional check is recommended using a portable


oscilloscope. The four IA signals can be accessed directly from the Controller by plugging
into the AUX METER jacks on the front of the Controller. By turning the “Auxiliary Tester
Signals” switch to the four IA positions, each armature current can be observed. The scope
should be set at the 1v per division (vertical) and 2 msec per division (horizontal). The zero
current trace should be one division below the top of the screen. At full current (790 amp –
L-1350), (1050 amp – L-1850) and (1250 amp – L-2350), each IA waveform should look
similar to the trace shown below.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AB016 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

SECTION 4, PART 3
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


LUBRICATION AND SERVICE
LETOURNEAU, INC.
DIGITALLY CONTROLLED LOADER
OSL- 4 PART 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE REQUIREMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
(OVERVIEW)
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICANT INTERVALS
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS
RECOMMENDED LUBRICATION INTERVALS – NORMAL OPERATION
LUBRICATING THE LOADER UNDER EXTREME CONDITIONS
LUBRICANT STORAGE
AC GENERATOR AND DRIVE MOTOR LUBRICATION
LUBRICATION AND FLUID SPECIFICATIONS
OVERVIEW OF RECOMMENDED FILTER REPLACEMENT AND SPECIAL CLEANING
REQUIREMENTS
LUBRICATING OIL ANALYSIS
THE ROLE OF LUBRICATING OIL ANALYSIS IN A PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
PROGRAM
PROGRAM OPERATION
ANALYSIS OF LUBRICATING OIL IN LETOURNEAU, INC. DRIVERS AND
GEARBOXES
SAMPLE COLLECTION
PROPER DOCUMENTATION
RECOMMENDED TESTS
WEAR TREND ANALYSIS
SYNTHETIC AND SPECIALTY LUBRICANTS
ANALYSIS OF HYDRAULIC FLUID
ANALYSIS OF HYDRAULIC PUMP GEARBOX OIL
CLEANLINESS TARGETS
ANALYSIS OF ENGINE LUBRICATION OIL
AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM OPERATION AND SERVICE
SYSTEM OPERATION OVERVIEW (L-1350 EARLY PRODUCTION UNITS)
SYSTEM OPERATION OVERVIEW (L-1350, L-1850 & L-2350 CURRENT
PRODUCTION UNITS)
PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE ADJUSTMENT
FLOW CONTROL VALVE ADJUSTMENT
LUBRICATED COMPONENTS
CYLINDERS
BALL CAPS AND BEARINGS
PIN STRUCTURES
LUBRICATION TIMER AND OPERATOR ALERTS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AC001 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


FILLING THE GREASE RESERVOIR
METHOD 1
METHOD 2
PRIMING THE SYSTEM AND USING THE AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM’S
MANUAL LUBRICATION FUNCTION
SUPPLY LINES
FEEDER LINES
INJECTORS
AUTOLUBE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
IN-LINE FILTER REPLACEMENT
GREASE RESERVOIR HEATER (Optional)
TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
SINGLE-SHOT AUTOLUBE WITHOUT ENGINE RPM (L-1350)
LINCOLN AUTOLUBE COMPONENTS PRODUCT INFORMATION (L-1350 pneumatic
models) (L-1350-L-1850-L2350 hydraulic models)
AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure 1. LUBRICATION AND FLUID SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 2. FILTERS GENERAL MACHINE LOCATIONS
Figure 3. SPECIAL CLEANING REQUIREMENTS
Figure 4. ENGINE OIL AND HYDRAULIC FLUID OIL SAMPLING QUICK CONNECT
FITTINGS (Optional)
Figure 5. OIL ANALYSIS REPORT FORM
Figure 6. AUTOLUBE SYSTEM COMPONENTS (L-1350 EARLY PRODUCTION
UNITS)
Figure 6.1. AUTO LUBE SYSTEM COMPONENTS (L-1350, L-1850, & L-2350
CURRENT PRODUCTION UNITS)
Figure 7. PRESSURE SWITCH (EARLY PRODUCTION UNITS) OR PRESSURE
SENSOR (CURRENT PRODUCTION UNITS) (AS APPLICABLE)
Figure 7.1. PRESSURE AND FLOW CONTROL ADJUSTMENTS
Figure 8. AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM – LOCATION OF LUBRICATED
COMPONENTS
Figure 9. GREASE RESERVOIR REMOTE FILLER FITTING AND OVERFLOW TUBE
Figure 10. LUBRICATION CYCLE SWITCH
Figure 11. LUBRICATION SYSTEM INJECTION BANK
Figure 12. AUTOLUBE SYSTEM COMPONENTS – MACHINE LOCATIONS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AC001 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LUBRICATION & SERV REQS & RECOMMENDATIONS (OVERVIEW) 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


LUBRICATION AND SERVICE REQUIREMENTS AND
RECOMMENDATIONS (OVERVIEW)
Regular lubrication and service of LeTourneau, Inc. equipment is essential to obtaining
maximum component life and reducing downtime. Lubrication related component failures are
most often caused by one of the following:
• Unsuitable grade or type of lubricant.
• The lubricant is contaminated by dust, dirt, water or dilution by fuel.
• A suitable lubrication schedule is not followed.
While lubrication can retard wear, it cannot entirely prevent it. Wear can result from dust
contamination or failure of the lubricating system to maintain a proper film on moving parts.
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICATION INTERVALS
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS
Recommended Iubricants are indicated in illustration "LUBRICATION AND FLUID
SPECIFICATIONS". These lubricants are listed for informational purposes only and based on
normal operating conditions. Equivalent grades and types may be substituted UNLESS a
specific lubricant is specified.

Do not mix brands or type of lubricant without consulting lubricant


manufacturers. Damage to bearings or other components may result from
the mixing of incompatible lubricants.

The drivers and hydraulic pump gearbox is factory equipped with synthetic
oil. It is recommended that this same oil be used for subsequent servicing.

Change lubricant grades when temperatures are consistently in the next


higher or lower temperature range as specified on illustration
"LUBRICATION AND FLUID SPECIFICATIONS".

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AC003 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LUBRICATION & SERV REQS & RECOMMENDATIONS (OVERVIEW) 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


RECOMMENDED LUBRICATION INTERVALS - NORMAL OPERATION
Lubrication intervals and location of components are included in the MODULAR PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES and in the remaining paragraphs of this article. These
lubrication interval recommendations are based on normal operating conditions. For extreme
operating conditions, refer to LUBRICATING THE LOADER UNDER EXTREME
CONDITIONS.
LUBRICATING THE LOADER UNDER EXTREME CONDITIONS
Lubricate more frequently when the machine is subjected to extremes of temperature,
prolonged operation, sandy or dusty conditions or exposure to moisture. Lubrication periods
may be extended during periods of inactivity.
Your lubricant supplier and/or authorized LeTourneau, Inc. distributor should be contacted
periodically to arrange for a lubrication engineer to accompany maintenance personnel on a
thorough inspection of the lubrication points on the loader. The focus of this inspection should
be verification that the lubricants used and the lubrication intervals are adequate for the
conditions under which the loader is being operated.
By working with the lubrication engineer, it can be determined where modifications to
recommendations for normal operating conditions might be required to make the equipment
run more smoothly, longer and more economically. It may also be determined if a more
suitable grade of lubricant might give better protection, improve safety, reduce fire hazards,
and cut the cost of removing dripped lubricant should the machine be used in other than
normal conditions.
LUBRICANT STORAGE
It is ESSENTIAL to store lubricants in a location indoors and to develop a definite schedule for
taking stock, refilling containers or lubricating systems, and cleaning, with assigned personnel
responsible for the schedule.

Lubricants contaminated with dirt, sand, or water should not be used.

AC GENERATOR AND DRIVE MOTOR LUBRICATION


The AC Generator and traction motors on the loader are equipped with sealed bearings.
These bearings require no lubrication unless the generator or motor is disassembled.
Disassembly of the AC generator and traction motors should only be performed by a
LeTourneau, Inc. authorized rebuild center.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AC003 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LUBRICATION & FLUID SPECS & FIGURE 1 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


LUBRICATION AND FLUID SPECIFICATIONS
The following specifications apply to Models L-1350, L-1850 and L-2350 unless individually
specified. When individually specified refer only to data applicable to your machine.
MODEL COMPONENT CAPACITY LUBRICANT OR FLUID
L-1350 Engine Detroit 58 219
Crankcase gallons liters
(includes Cummins 48 182 liters
filters) gallons
Detroit 50 189
L-1850 gallons liters
Refer to engine manufacturer’s
Cummins 54 204 specifications
gallons liters
Detroit 60 207 liters
L-2350 gallons
Cummins 58 219 liters
gallons
Detroit
L-1350 101 382
Cummins gallons liters
Radiator Detroit
L-1850 110 416
Cummins gallons liters
Detroit
L-2350 120 414
Cummins gallons liters
L-1350 Driver 51B Approx. Approx.
36 135.26 Mobilgear SHC 460
gallons liters
L-1850/ Driver 57 Approx. Approx.
L-2350 25 gals 94.6
liters

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AC005 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LUBRICATION & FLUID SPECS & FIGURE 1 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

MODEL COMPONENT CAPACITY LUBRICANT OR FLUID


CRANKCASE OILS

Hydraulic SAE Viscosity


System Designation:
Operating
Temp. Range*

-23ºC to 54ºC 5W, 5W-20, 5W-


(-10ºF to 130ºF 30

-18ºC to 83ºC 10W


(0ºF to 180ºF)

ANTI-WEAR HYDRAULIC OILS WITH


L-1350 ZINC ADDITIVES1
375 1,419.4
L-1850 Hydraulic Reservoir
gallons liters Hydraulic System ISO Viscosity
L-2350
Operating Temp. Grade:
Range
-6°C to 49°C (- 22
20°F to 120°F)
-15°C to 60°C (5° 32
F to 140°F)
21°C to 77°C (70° 46
F to 170°F)
*Temperatures shown are cold (ambient)
start-up to maximum operating. During
cold start-up, avoid high-speed operation
of hydraulic components until the system
is warmed up to provide adequate
lubrication.

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AC005 ( d 2 )
SERVICE MANUAL
LUBRICATION & FLUID SPECS & FIGURE 1 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

MODEL COMPONENT CAPACITY LUBRICANT OR FLUID


L-1350 925 3497
gallons liters Grade C diesel fuel equal to Grade D-2
ASTM D-975 classification for Detroit
L-1850 1050 3975
Fuel Tank Diesel engine. No. 1 or 2 diesel fuel
gallons liters
for Cummins engine. See engine
L-2350 1305* 4939 manufacturer’s specification.
gallons liters
L-1350 +50ºF and above, use NLGI #1 grease.
L-1850 Lincoln Automatic 240 lbs. 108.86 +10ºF to 50ºF, use NLGI #0 grease.
L-2350 Lubrication kg -30ºF to +10ºF, use NLGI #00 grease
(minimum “Molybdenum Disulphate”
3%)
L-1350
L-1850 Blower Load Adapter Approx. .95 SAE 10W-40 or 15W-40W gear oil
L-2350 1 qt. liters
L-1350
L-1850 Hydraulic Pump Gearbox2 7 27 liters SAE 75W-140 synthetic gear oil or
L-2350 gallons SAE 80W-90W gear oil or 15W-40
engine oil.
Be sure all oil is suitable for climate at your location. See your oil
vendor to assure the oil will flow at minimum temperature
experienced. Using lubricants other that what is specified by the
manufacturer (including viscosity differences) can cause severe
damage to components.
1 ARCTIC CONDITIONS represent a specialized field where extensive use is made of heating equipment
before starting. If necessary, this and judicious use of the following recommendations should be used: (1)
SAE 5W or 5W-20 oil, (2) Oils specially developed for use in arctic conditions, such as synthetics. - Operating
temperature should be closely monitored to avoid exceeding a temperature of 54°C (130°F) with any
lightweight oil. - SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS: When special considerations indicate a need to depart from
recommended oils or operating conditions, consult your LeTourneau, Inc. representative.
2 Refer to HYDRAULIC PUMP GEARBOX SERVICE. The hydraulic pump gearbox is factory equipped with
synthetic oil.
* Early model 1050 Gallons (3975 Liters)
Figure 1. LUBRICATION AND FLUID SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AC005 ( d 3 )
SERVICE MANUAL
NOTES

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication System-The page may not include all relevant data,
such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found elsewhere in the complete document or in other applicable service
information documents. Make sure you have read and understood all associated information before performing any maintenance on the
machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to understand the current instructions of the manufacturer and the
manuals, for the specific operation concerned.
LeTourneau, Inc. © 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER NOTES ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERVIEW OF RECOMMENDED FILTER REPLACE & SPECIAL CLEANING REQS 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!


OVERVIEW OF RECOMMENDED FILTER REPLACEMENT
AND SPECIAL CLEANING REQUIREMENTS

This chart provides a summary overview of the various filters that must be replaced
as part of a routine preventive maintenance program. Refer to FILTERS -
GENERAL MACHINE LOCATIONS for general location of each filter listed. Refer to
PARTS CATALOG for filter part numbers specific to your machine. Special cleaning
requirements for various components, in addition to filter replacement, are also
listed.

It is essential to review the instructions within this manual and the engine
manufacturer’s owner’s manual (available on the manufacturer’s website)
regarding the replacement of these filters before attempting to service the
machine. The right hand column provides the location of applicable
instructions within the SERVICE MANUAL or the engine manufacturer’s
manual.
COMPONENT FILTER FILTER RECOMMENDED1 OPERATING AND
TYPE/NUMBER REPLACEMENT SERVICE
INTERVAL MANUAL
REFERENCE
(AS APPLICABLE)
Engine Oil Spin-on – Number Refer to engine
varies with engine 500 hours manufacturer owner’s
model3. manual.
Spin-on - Number Refer to engine
Fuel varies with engine 500 hours manufacturer owner’s
model3. manual.
Fuel Processor Spin-on (1) 500 hours FUEL FILTERS AND
(Detroit Diesel) FUEL PROCESSOR
Spin-on - Number Refer to engine
By-Pass varies with 500 hours manufacturer owner’s
(Detroit Diesel manufacturer manual.
Equipped
Machines Only)
Safety element - Monitor air restriction ENGINE AIR FILTER
Air number varies with indicators. Check filters REPLACEMENT
machine model4. every 100 hours. AND OPERATOR
ALARM
Coolant Spin-on - Number Refer to engine
varies with engine 500 hours manufacturer owner’s
Conditioning
(Cummins model. manual.
Engine Only)

NOTE: If you have printed a page from the LEPDS-LeTourneau Electronic Publication Delivery System-The page may not include all relevant
data, such as specifications, Warnings, Cautions or Notes that may be found in other documentation. Verify you have read and understood
all associated information before performing any work on the machine. It is the responsibility of the mechanic, repairman or inspector to
understand all instructions for the specific work being performed.
LeTourneau, Inc. 2005 All Rights Reserved 50 SERIES DIGITAL LOADER 004AC007 ( d 1 )
SERVICE MANUAL
OVERVIEW OF RECOMMENDED FILTER REPLACE & SPECIAL CLEANING REQS 1_2

Training only! Always use your machine original documentation!

Tank Return L-1350-L-1850


Canister (2)
L-2350 Canister (3) 1500 hours
Case Drain
Spin-on (2)
HYDRAULIC
Hydraulic Pump Spin-on (1) SYSTEM SERVICE
Hydraulic System Gearbox Air REQUIREMENTS
Breather 1500 hours AND OPERATIONAL
Hydraulic Pump CONCERNS
Gearbox Oil Spin-on (1)
Auxiliary Oil Canister (1) 1500 hours
Cooler
(optional)
Auto Lube System In-line Strainer (2) Clean or replace